YFP 339: YFP Podcast Replay – Why Negotiation is an Important Part of Your Financial Plan


Tim Ulbrich & Tim Baker talk about negotiation, why it’s an important part of the financial plan, the goals of negotiation, and tips for conducting an effective negotiation.

Episode Summary

Tim Baker joins Tim Ulbrich on this episode to dig into all things negotiation. Negotiation is the process of discovery and a way to advocate for yourself and what your needs are. Tim Baker explains that negotiation is an important part of your financial plan for many reasons. He explains that settling for a lower salary can have a significant impact on your present and future finances because you may accrue less in retirement savings and potentially other investments. However, negotiation doesn’t just lie in your salary. You can also negotiate benefits like flex scheduling, paid time off as well as potentially parental leave and professional development opportunities, among others. 

Tim Baker shares that 99% of hiring managers are expecting new hires to negotiate and build their initial offer as such. Many don’t end up negotiating because they don’t want to risk the offer being revoked, but Tim says that the majority of the time you should present a counter offer.  

Tim then digs into the stages of the negotiation process that include the interview, receiving an offer, presenting a counter offer and accepting the offer and position. He shares many strategies and tips for each stage as well as additional techniques to use throughout the process.

About Today’s Guest

Tim Baker is the Co-Founder and Director of Financial Planning at Your Financial Pharmacist. Founded in 2015, YFP is a fee-only financial planning firm and connects with the YFP community of 12,000+ pharmacy professionals via the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast podcast, blog, website resources and speaking engagements. 

Tim attended the United States Military Academy majoring in International Relations and branching Armor. After his military career, he worked as a logistician with a major retailer and a construction company. After much deliberation, Tim decided to make a pivot in his career and joined a small independent financial planning firm in 2012. In 2016, he launched his own financial planning firm Script Financial and in 2019 merged with Your Financial Pharmacist. Tim now lives in Columbus, Ohio with his wife (Shay), two kids (Olivia and Liam), and dog (Benji).

Key Points from the Episode

  • Negotiation can be a key part of the financial plan
  • Income is the lifeblood of the financial plan. 
  • Learn ways to grow and protect income. 
  • Advocating for yourself is important, and it’s not always just about salary.
  • A lower salary can have long term consequence down the road. 
  • Employers expect some negotiations with candidates. 
  • Salary alone should not be looked at in a vacuum; many factors can contribute a more desirable work positon.
  • A lot of time and effort goes into finding the right position for a job, so when an offer is made it is likely not going to be derailed by candidate asking for a higher salary.
  • A good candidate asks questions and listens well. 
  • Make sure you get offers in writing. 
  • Never lie in an interview about current salary range.
  • Using a precise number versus a rounded number in a counter offer has more success.
  • Using the anchoring technique to provide a salary range can help you land the salary you ultimately desire.
  • Asking a calibrated question is a question with really no fixed answer that gives the illusion of control.
  • Using “how”, “when”, “why” calibrated questions can be helpful in showing what you’re really trying to achieve without causing emotions to rise.
  • Mirroring technique is repeating 1-3 words back to the employer to show you are listening well and in turn, making them feel respected and understood.
  • Labeling and validating emotions technique allow you to hear what is going on in an organization while remaining neutral.
  • The accusation audit is a technique that’s used to identify and label probably the worst thing that your counterpart could say about it.

Episode Highlights

“Yeah, so negotiation, you know, it’s really a process of discovery. It really shouldn’t be viewed as a battle. It’s really a process of discovery. It’s kind of that awkward conversation that you should be obligated to have because you know, if you don’t want to advocate for yourself professionally, who will?” – Tim Baker 

“And I believe this first stat comes from SHRM, which is the Society for Human Resource Management. So I think this is like the biggest association for like HR and Human Resource personnel in the country. And the stat that I use is that 99% of hiring managers expect prospective hires to negotiate. So if you think about that, you know, the overwhelming majority expect you the prospective hire to negotiate. And they build their initial offers as such.” – Tim Baker

“So typically most jobs, there’s — obviously there’s an application process, there’s interviews, there’s second interviews, there’s maybe on-site visits, there’s kind of looking at all the candidates and then extending offers. If you get to that offer stage, you’re pretty — they’ve identified as you’re the person that they want. So sometimes a little bit of back-and-forth is not going to derail any such deal. So it’s really, really important to understand that.” -Tim Baker

“So when you get that interview, what I say is typically you want to talk less, listen more and learn more. Typically, the person that is talking the most is not in control of the conversation. The one that’s listening and asking good questions is in control.” -Tim Ulbrich

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

(INTRO)

Tim Ulbrich: Tim Baker, welcome back to the show. 

Tim Baker: Yeah, happy to be here. How’s it going, Tim?

Tim Ulbrich: It’s going. Excited to talk negotiation, something we discuss a lot in presentations, a lot I know that you discuss with clients as a part of the financial plan, but we haven’t addressed it directly on the show before. So I’m excited that we get a chance to dig into this topic. And we know that negotiation can carry a lot of power and can be used across the board really in life, right? It could be negotiating terms for a new or existing job position, buying a car, buying a house, negotiating with your kids or spouse — kidding, not kidding as we’ll talk about here in a little bit. So we’re going to focus predominantly on salary negotiation, but really these techniques can be applied to many areas of the financial plan and really life as a whole. So Tim, I know that for you, negotiation is a key piece of the financial plan. And you and our CFPs over at YFP talk about negotiation in the context of financial planning, which I would say is probably not the norm of the financial planning industry and services. So let’s start with this: Why is negotiation such an important piece of the financial plan?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so I think if we look at YFP’s mission, YFP’s mission is to empower pharmacists to achieve financial freedom. So I think the building blocks of that really is kind of what we do day-in and day-out with clients at YFP Planning. And what I typically, or the way that we typically approach a financial plan is we really want to help the client grow and protect their income, which is the lifeblood of the financial plan. Without income, nothing moves. But we know that probably more importantly than that is grow and protect the balance sheet, the net worth, which means increasing assets efficiently and decreasing liabilities efficiently and ultimately moving the net worth number in the right direction. So those are both quantitative things. But then qualitatively, we want to make sure that we’re keeping all the goals in mind, so grow and protect income and net worth while keep the goals in mind. So to me, that’s our jam, you know? So when I say — when somebody asks me a question like we do the Ask a YFP CFP, and I always say, “Well, it depends.” A lot of it really depends on those foundational, like where are we at with the balance sheet and where do we want to go? Meaning what are our goals? What’s our why? What’s the life plan, what’s a wealthy life for you and how can we support that with the financial plan? So to go back to your question, my belief is that the income is a big part of that. 

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Tim Baker: And what I’ve found working with many, many pharmacists is sometimes pharmacists are not great at advocating for themselves. You know, most of the people that I talk to when we talk about salary negotiation, they’re like, eh, I’m just thankful I have a job, and I’m in agreement with that. But sometimes a little bit of a negotiation and having some of the skills that we’ll talk about today to better advocate for yourself is important. And a lot of this stuff is not necessarily just for salary. It can be for a lot of different things. But to me, what I saw as a need here, same thing like most financial planners don’t walk you through kind of home purchase and what that looks like because most financial planners are working with people in their 50s, 60s and 70s. So that was a need for a lot of our clients who were like, “Hey, Tim, I’m buying this house. I don’t really know where to start. So we provide some education and some recommendations and advice around that. Same thing with salary, I kept seeing like well, maybe I took the job too quickly or I didn’t advocate for myself, so that’s really where we want to provide some education and advice, again, to have a better position from an income perspective. 

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think it’s a great tool to have in your toolbag, you know. And I think as we’ll talk about here, the goal is not to be an expert negotiator. There’s lots of resources that are out there that can help with this and make it tangible and practical, one of which we’ll draw a lot of the information today, I know you talk with clients, a resource I love, “Never Split the Difference” by Chris Voss. But I’m glad you mentioned, you know, I think there is often a sentiment — I know I’ve felt in myself where you know what, I’m glad to have a position, I’m glad to be making a good income. But that can be true and you still can be a good person and you still can negotiate and advocate for yourself and the value you bring to the organization. 

Tim Baker: Yes.

Tim Ulbrich: So I hope folks will hear that and not necessarily think that negotiation is bad and as we’ll talk about here in a moment, I think really can have a significant impact when you think about it as it relates to earnings over your career and what those additional earnings could mean. So Tim, break it down for us. What is negotiation and really, digging further, why is it important?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so negotiation, you know, it’s really a process of discovery. It really shouldn’t be viewed as a battle. It’s really a process of discovery. It’s kind of that awkward conversation that you should be obligated to have because you know, if you don’t want to advocate for yourself professionally, who will? And maybe you have a good mentor or something like that, but to me, the negotiation, again, is really to discover what you want and kind of what your counterpart, which might be a boss or a hiring manager or something like that. And it’s really important because settling for a lower salary can have really major financial consequences, both immediately and down the road. And you typically — raises that you receive are typically based on a percentage of your salary, so hey, we’re going to give you a 3% raise this year, a 5% raise. If you start off with a salary that you’re not happy with, then obviously that’s a problem. Accrue less in retirement savings, so that TSP, that 401k, 403b, again, you typically are going to get some type of match in a lot of cases, and then you’re going to put a percentage. So again, that could potentially be lower. But it’s not just about salary. It can be — I think another mistake that sometimes people make is that they’ll say, oh wow, I was making $125,000 and I’m taking a job that’s paying me $135,000 and they take a major step back on some of the non-salary things like benefits and flex scheduling and time off and things like that. But you know, you really want to make sure that compensation package that you have, you know, you’re happy with. Because underpaid really can make you feel resentful over the long run. So you want to make sure that you’re, again, right now we’re filming in the midst of a pandemic and the economy and the job market is tough, but you still want to advocate for yourself and make sure you’re getting the best compensation package that you can. 

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and as we’ll talk about here in a little bit, I think if we frame this differently, then maybe our understanding, our preconceived beliefs — you know, you mentioned it’s not a battle, you know, I think the goal is that you’re trying to come to an agreement or an understanding. And as we’ll talk about here, many employers are likely expecting this. And that number, in terms of those that are expecting versus those that are actually engaging in the conversation from an employee standpoint is very different. 

Tim Baker: Sure. 

Tim Ulbrich: So I think that might help give us confidence to be able to initiate some of those, and we’ll talk about strategies to do that. I do want to give one example, though, Tim, real quick. You had mentioned obviously if somebody earns less and receive small raises or they accrue less in retirement savings, that can have a significant impact. And I went down the rabbit hole prepping for this episode of just looking at a quick example of this where you have two folks that let’s say they both start working at the age of 28, they retire at their 65, so same starting point, same retirement age. Let’s assume they get a 3% cost of living adjustment every year for their career just to keep it simple. The only difference here is that one starts at $100,000 and one starts at $105,000. So because of either what they asked for in negotiations, whatever be the case, one starts $5,000 greater than the other. And if you play this out, same starting age, same ending age, same cost of living adjustments, one starts at a higher point, when it’s all said and done, one individual has about $300,000 more of earnings than the other. And this of course does not include differences that you also have because of higher salary. If you had a match, that would increase, that would compound, that would grow. If you were to switch jobs, you’re at a better point to now negotiate for a higher salary, all other benefits that aren’t included. But the significance of the starting point I think is something to really look at those numbers that often where you start can inform where you’re going, not only from cost of living adjustments but also future employment, right? So we know that where you start if you get a 3% raise, it’s of course going to be based off that number. If you decide to leave that employer and you go to another one, what do they ask you? How much did you make? You’re using that number. So that starting point is so critical, and I hope that new practitioners might even find some confidence in that to be able to engage in discussions knowing how significant those numbers can be over a career. So in that one example, that starting point is a difference of about $300,000. Crazy, right, when you look at it over a long time period.

Tim Baker: Yeah, it’s nuts. And I’d play the devil’s advocate, on the other side of that is again, so much — just like everything else with the financial plan, you can’t look at it in a vacuum. We’ve had clients take a lot less money and really, it was because of the student loans and how that would affect their strategy in terms of forgiveness and things like that. 

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Tim Baker: So it is multifactorial. It’s definitely something that it should really be examined. And I think, again, when you look at the overall context of the financial plan. But to your point, Tim, that starting salary and really how you negotiate throughout the course of your career is going to be utterly important. And again, what we say is — we kind of downplay the income because I think so much of what’s kind of taught is like, oh, six-figure salary, you’ll be OK. And that’s not true. But then it is true that it is the lifeblood of the financial plan, so I think if you have a plan and you’re intentional with what you’re doing, that’s where you can really start making moves with regard to your financial outlook.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I’m glad you said that about salary shouldn’t be looked at in a silo. I mean, just to further that point, you’ve alluded to it already, these numbers don’t matter if there’s other variables that are non-monetary that matter more. Right? Whether that be time off or satisfaction in the workplace, opportunities that you have, feelings of accomplishment. I mean, the whole list of things you can’t necessarily put a number to, I mean, I would argue if those are really important, you’ve got to weigh those against whatever this number would be. And there’s a certain point where the difference in money isn’t worth it if there’s other variables that are involved, which usually there are. Hopefully we can get both, right? Salary and non-salary items.

Tim Baker: Yes.

Tim Ulbrich: So interesting stats about negotiation, I’ve heard you present before on this topic, but I’d like you to share with our audience in terms of managers that are expecting hires to negotiate versus those that do. Talk us through some of those as I think it will help us frame and maybe change our perception on employers expecting and our willingness to engage in these conversations. 

Tim Baker: Yeah, and I really need to cite this one. And I believe this first stat comes from SHRM, which is the Society for Human Resource Management. So I think this is like the biggest association for like HR and Human Resource personnel in the country. And the stat that I use is that 99% of hiring managers expect prospective hires to negotiate. So if you think about that, you know, the overwhelming majority expect you the prospective hire to negotiate. And they build their initial offers as such. So the example I give to clients is like, hey, we have a position that we could pay anywhere from $110,000 to $130,000, knowing that you know, Tim, if I’m offering this job to you, knowing that you’re probably going to negotiate with me. I’m going to offer it to you for $110,000 knowing that I have a little bit of wiggle room if you kind of come back with a counteroffer. But what a lot of my clients or people do that I talk with is they’ll just say, yes, I found a job, crappy job market, happy to get started, ready to get started. And they’re either overly enthusiastic to accept a job or they’re just afraid that a little bit of negotiation would hurt their outlook. So with that in mind is that you — the offers I think are built in a way that you should be negotiating and trying to, again, advocate for yourself. 

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and so if people are presenting positions often with a range in salary expecting negotiation, I hope that gives folks some confidence in OK, that’s probably expected and maybe shifts some of the perception away from, this whole thing could fall apart, which it could, right? At any given point in time, especially depending on the way you conduct yourself in that negotiation, which I think is really, really important to consider. But I think what we want to try to avoid, Tim, back to a comment you made earlier, is any resentment as well. I mean, if we think about this from a relationship standpoint, we want the employee to feel valued, and we want the employer to have a shot at retaining this individual long-term. So it’s a two-way relationship.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and it kind of comes up to where we were talking about what is the goal of negotiation. And really, the goal of negotiation is to come to some type of agreement.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. 

Tim Baker: The problem with that is that people are involved in this. And we as people are emotional beings, so if we feel like that we’re treated unfairly or we don’t feel safe and secure or if we’re not in control of the conversation, our emotions can get the best of us. So that’s important. So again, there’s some techniques that you can utilize to kind of mitigate that. But you know, to allude to your point about negotiating, the fear to kind of potentially mess up the deal, there’s a stat that says 32% don’t negotiate because they’re too worried about losing the job offer. 

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. 

Tim Baker: I know, Tim, like we can attest to this because with our growth at YFP, we’ve definitely done some human resourcing, to use that as a verb, and hiring and things like that of late. And I’ve got to say that the — I think that some of this can be unfounded just because there’s just so much blood, sweat and tears that goes into finding the right people to kind of surround yourself with and bring into an organization that to me, a little bit of back-and-forth is not going to ultimately lose the job. So typically most jobs, there’s — obviously there’s an application process, there’s interviews, there’s second interviews, there’s maybe on-site visits, there’s kind of looking at all the candidates and then extending offers. If you get to that offer stage, you’re pretty — they’ve identified as you’re the person that they want. So sometimes a little bit of back-and-forth is not going to derail any such deal. So it’s really, really important to understand that.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and as the employer, I mean, we’ve all heard about the cost statistics around retention. So as an employer, when I find that person, I want to retain them. That’s my goal, right? I want to find good talent, I want to retain good talent. So I certainly don’t want somebody being resentful about the work that they’re doing, the pay that they have, and so I think if we can work some of that out before beginning, come to an agreement, it’s a good fit for us, good fit for them, I think it’s also going to help the benefit of hopefully the long-term relationship of that engagement. So it’s one thing to say we should be doing it. It’s another thing to say, well how do we actually do this? What are some tips and tricks for negotiation? So I thought it would be helpful if we could walk through some of the stages of negotiation. And through those stages, we can talk, as well as beyond that, what are some actual strategies to negotiation. Again, another shoutout to “Never Split the Difference” by Chris Voss. I think he does an awesome job of teaching these strategies in a way that really helps them come alive and are memorable.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: So Tim, let’s talk about the first stage, the interview stage, and what are some strategies that those listening can take when it comes to negotiation in this stage.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so when I present these concepts to a client, I kind of said that the four stages of negotiation are fairly vanilla, you know? And the first one is that interview. So when you get that interview, what I say is typically you want to talk less, listen more and learn more. Typically, the person that is talking the most is not in control of the conversation. The one that’s listening and asking good questions is in control. And I kind of think back to some of our recent hires, and you know, the people that we identified as like top candidates, I’m like, man, their interviews went really well. And when I actually think back and slow down, it’s really — I think that they went really well because it’s really that person asking good questions and then me just talking. And that’s like the perception. So in that case, the candidate was asking us good questions and we’re like, yeah, this was a great interview because I like to hear myself talk or I just get really excited about what we’re doing at YFP. So I think if you can really focus on your counterpart, focus on the organization, whether it’s the hospital or whatever it is and learn and then really pivot to the value that you bring, I think that’s going to be most important. So you know, understanding what some of their pain points are, whether it’s retention or maybe some type of care issue or whatever that may be, you can kind of use that to your advantage as you’re kind of going through the different stages of negotiation. But the more that the other person talks, the better. I would say in the interview stage, one of the things that often comes up that can come up fairly soon is the question about salary. And you know, sometimes that is — it’s kind of like a time savings. So it’s a “Hey, Tim, what are you looking for in salary?” If you throw out a number that’s way too high, I’m not even going to waste my time. And what I tell clients is like you typically, you want to — and we’ll talk about anchoring. You really want to avoid throwing a number out for a variety of reasons. So one of the deflections you can use is, “Hey, I appreciate the question, but I’m really trying to figure out if I’d be a good fit for your organization. Let’s talk about salary when the time comes.” Or the other piece of it is it’s just you’re not in the business of offering yourself a job. And what I mean by that it’s their job to basically provide an offer. So, “Hey, my current employer doesn’t really allow me to kind of reveal that kind of information. What did you have in mind?” Or, “We know that pharmacy is a small business, and I’m sure your budget is reasonable. What did you have in mind?”

Tim Ulbrich: Right. 

Tim Baker: So at the end of the day, it’s their job to extend the offer, not you to kind of negotiate against yourself, which can happen. You know? I had — we signed on a client here at YFP Planning yesterday, and we were talking about negotiation. I think it had to do with a tax issue. And you know, he basically said this is what he was looking for and when he got into the organization, I think he saw the number that was budgeted for it, and it was a lot more. So again, if you can deflect that — and I tell a story, when I first got out of the Army, I kind of knew this. But when I first got out of the Army, I was interviewing for jobs. I was in an interview, and I deflected and I think the guy asked me again, and I deflected. I think he asked me for like — maybe he asked me four times, and I just wound up giving him a range that was like obnoxious, $100,000-200,000 or something like that. But to me, that — and the interview didn’t go well after that, but to me, it was more about clearing the slate instead of actually learning about me and seeing if I was a good fit. So you never want to lie if they ask about your current salary, you never want to lie. But you definitely want to deflect and move to things like OK, can I potentially be a good fit for your organization and then go from there.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think deflection takes practice, right? 

Tim Baker: Yeah. 

Tim Ulbrich: I don’t think that comes natural to many of us.

Tim Baker: Absolutely. Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: This reminds me, so talk less, listen more for any Hamilton folks we have out there, which is playing 24/7 in my house these days, the soundtrack. I’m not going to sing right now, but talk less, smile more, don’t let them know what you’re against or what you’re for. So I think that’s a good connection there to the interview stage. So next hopefully comes good news, company wants to hire you, makes an offer. So Tim, talk us through this stage. What should we be remembering when we actually have an offer on the table? 

Tim Baker: Yeah, so I think you definitely want to be appreciative and thankful. Again, when a company gets to a point where they’re an extending you an offer, that’s huge. I remember when I got, again, my first offer out of the Army — because again, you didn’t really have a choice when you’re in the Army. Well, I guess you do have a choice, but they’re not like, “Here’s a written offer for your employment in this platoon somewhere in Iraq.” But I remember getting the first offer. I’m like, man, this is awesome. Shows your salary and the benefits and things like that, so you want to be appreciable and thankful — appreciative and thankful. You don’t want to be — you want to be excited but not too overexcited. So you don’t want to appear to be desperate. What I tell clients, I think the biggest piece here is make sure you get it in writing. And I have a story that I tell because if it’s not in writing, and what I essentially said is it didn’t happen. So again, using some personal experience here, first job out of the Army, I had negotiated basically an extra week of vacation because I didn’t want to take a step back in that regard. And I got the offer, and the extra week wasn’t there. So I talked to my future boss about it, and he said, “You know what, I don’t want to go back to headquarters and ruffle some feathers, so why don’t we just take care of that on site here?” And this was the job I had in Columbus, Ohio. And I said, “Yeah, OK, I don’t really want to ruffle feathers either.” The problem with that was when he got replaced, when he was terminated eight months later, that currency burned up fairly quickly. So I didn’t have that extra week of vacation. So if it’s not written down, it never happened. So you want to make sure that you get it in writing and really go over that written offer extensively. So some employers, they’ll extend an offer, and they want a decision right away. I would walk away from that. To me, a job change or something of that magnitude, I think it warrants a 24-, if not a minimum 48-hour timeframe for you to kind of mull it over. And this is typically where I come in and help clients because they’ll say, “Hey, Tim, I got this offer. What do you think?” And we go through it and we look at benefits and we look at the total compensation package and things like that. But you want to ask for a time, some time to review everything. And then definitely adhere to the agreed-upon deadline to basically provide an answer or a counteroffer or whatever the next step is for you.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think too, the advice to get it in writing helps buy you time, you know? I think you ask for it anyways. And I think the way you approach this conversation, you’re setting up the counteroffer, right? So the tone that you’re using, it’s not about being arrogant here, it’s not about acting like you’re not excited at all. I think you can strike that balance between you’re appreciative, you’re thankful, you’re continuing to assess if it’s a good fit for you and the organization, you want some time, you want it in writing, and you’re beginning to set the stage. And I think human behavior, right, says if something is either on the table or pulled away slightly, the other party wants it a little bit more, right? 

Tim Baker: Yes.

Tim Ulbrich: So if I’m the employer and I really want someone and I’m all excited about the offer and I’m hoping they’re going to say yes and they say, “Hey, I’m really thankful for the offer. I’m excited about what you guys are doing. I need some time to think about x, y and z,” or “I’m really thinking through x, y or z,” like all of a sudden, that makes me want them more. You know? 

Tim Baker: Sure.

Tim Ulbrich: So I think there’s value in setting up what is that counteroffer. So talk to us about the counteroffer, Tim. Break it down and some strategies to think about in this portion.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so you know, the counteroffer is I would say — the majority of the time, you should counter in some way. I think you’re expected to make a counter. And again, we kind of back that up with some stats. But you also, you need to know when not to kind of continue to go back to the negotiating table or when you’re asking or overasking. So I think research is going to be a good part of that. And what I tell clients is like, I can give them a very non-scientific — I’ve worked with so many pharmacists that I can kind of say, eh, that sounds low for this community pharmacy industry, or whatever, hospital, in this area. So your network, which could be someone like me, it could be colleagues, but it could also be things like Glass Door, Indeed, Salary.com. So you want to make sure that your offer, your counteroffer is backed up in some type of fact. And really, knowing how to maximize your leverage. So if you are — if you do receive more than one substantial offer from multiple employers, negotiating may be appropriate if the two positions are comparable. Or if you have tangible evidence that the salary is too low, you have a strong position to negotiate. So I had a client that knew that newly hired pharmacists were being paid more than she was, and she had the evidence to show that and basically they went back and did a nice adjustment. But again, I think as you go through — the way that we kind of do this with clients is we kind of go through the entire letter and the benefits. And I basically just highlight things and have questions about match or vacation time or salary, things like that. And then we start constructing it from there. So if you look at, again, the thing where most people will start is salary is you really want to give — when you counter, you really want to give a salary range rather than like a number. So what I say is, if you say, “Hey, Tim, I really want to make $100,000.” I kind of said it’s almost like the Big Bad Wolf that blows the house down. Like all of those zeros, there’s no substance to that. But if you said, “Hey, I really want to make $105,985,” the Journal of the Experimental Social Psychology says that using a precise number instead of a rounded number gives it a more potent anchor. 

Tim Ulbrich: You’ve done your homework, right? 

Tim Baker: Yeah. You know what you’re worth, you know what the position’s worth, it’s giving the appearance of research. So I kind of like — it’s kind of like the Zach Galfinakis meme that has all of the equations that are floating, it’s kind of like that. But the $100,000, you can just blow that house over. So and I think — so once you figure out that number, then you kind of want to range it. So they say if you give a range of a salary, then it opens up room for discussion and it shows the employer that you have flexibility. And it gives you some cushion in case you think that you’re asking for a little bit too high. So that’s going to be really, really important is to provide kind of precise numbers in a range. And oh, by the way, I want to be paid at the upper echelon of that.

Tim Ulbrich: So real quick on that, you mentioned before the concept of anchoring, and I want to spend some time here as you’re talking about a range. So dig into that further, what that means in terms of if I’m given a range, how does anchoring fit into that?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so we kind of talk about this more when we kind of talk some of the tools and the behavior of negotiation. But the range — so when we talk about like anchoring, so anchoring is actually — it’s a bias. So anchoring bias describes the common tendency to give too much weight to the first number. So again, if I can invite the listener to imagine an equation, and the equation is 5x4x3x2x1. And that’s in your mind’s eye. And then you clear the slate, and now you imagine this equation: 1x2x3x4x5. Now, if I show the average person and I just flash that number up, the first number — the first equation that starts with 5 and the second equation that starts with 1, we know that those things equal the same thing. But in the first equation, we see the 5 first, so it creates this anchor, creates this belief in us that that number is actually higher. 

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, bigger, yeah. 

Tim Baker: So the idea of anchoring is typically that that number that we see really is a — has a major influence, that first number is a major influence over where the negotiation goes. So you can kind of get into the whole idea of factoring your knowledge of the zone of possible agreement, which is often called ZOPA. So that’s the range of options that should be acceptable for both sides, and then kind of assessing your side of that and then your other party’s anchor in that. So there’s lots of things that kind of go into anchoring, but we did this recently with a client where I think they were offered somewhere in like the $110,000-112,000 area. And she’s like, I really want to get paid closer to like $117,000-118,000. So we basically in the counteroffer, we said, “Hey, thanks for the offer.” And we did something called an accusation, which we can talk about in a second. But “Thanks for the counteroffer, but I’m really looking to make between” — you know, I think we said something like $116,598 to all the way up into the $120,000s. And they actually brought her up to I think she was at $117,000 and change. So it actually brought her up closer to that $118,000. So using that range and kind of that range as a good anchoring position to help the negotiation. 

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, love it. 

Tim Baker: There’s lots of different things that kind of go into anchoring in terms of extreme anchoring and a lot of that stuff that they talk about in the book, but again, that kind of goes back to that first number being thrown out there can be really, really integral. And again, when you couple that on top of hey, it’s their job to make you an offer, not the other way around, you have to really learn how to deflect that and know how to position yourself in those negotiations. But that’s really the counteroffer. And what I would say to kind of just wrap up the counteroffer is embrace the silence. 

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. 

Tim Baker: So Tim, there was silence there, and I’m like, I want to fill the void. And I do this with clients when we talk about mirroring and things like that. Like people are uncomfortable with silence. And what he talks about in the book, which I would 100% — this is really kind of a tip of the cap to Chris Voss and his book, which I love, I read probably at least once a year, where he talks about embracing the silence. We as people are conditioned to fill silences. So he talks about sometimes people will negotiate against themselves. If you just sit there and you say, “Uh huh. That’s interesting.” And then in the counter, just be pleasantly persistent on the non-salary terms, which can be both subjective and objective in terms of what you’re looking for in that position.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I want to make sure we don’t lose that. We’re talking a lot about salary, but again, as we mentioned at the beginning, really try to not only understand but fit what’s the value of those non-salary terms. So this could be everything from paid time off to obviously other benefits, whether that be health or retirement. This of course could be culture of the organization, whether it’s that specific site, the broader organization, opportunities for advancement. 

Tim Baker: Mentorship. Yep. Mentorship.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes, yes.

Tim Baker: Yep, all of that.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think what you hear from folks — I know I’ve felt in my own personal career, with each year that goes on, I value salary, but salary means less and those other things mean more. And so as you’re looking at let’s just say two offers, as one example, let’s say they’re $5,000 apart. I’m not saying you give on salary, but how do you factor in these other variables. 

Tim Baker: Yeah. Well, and I think too — and this is kind of next level with this, and I’ll give you some examples to cite it. I think another thing to potentially do when you are countering and when you’re shifting to some of maybe the non-salary stuff is really took a hard look at your potential employer or even your current employer if you’re an incumbent and you’re being reviewed and you’re just advocating for a better compensation, is look at the company’s mission and values. So the example I give is like when Shay and I got pregnant with Liam, she didn’t have a maternity leave benefit. And when she was being reviewed, we kind of invoked the company — and I think it’s like work-life balance and things like that — and we’re like, “Well, how can you say that and not back that up?” And again, we did it tactfully. Because you’re almost like negotiating against yourself, right? So when I present this to clients, the Spiderman meme where two Spidermans are pointing at each other, and she was able to negotiate a better, a maternity — and we look at us, and I give these, one of our values is encouraging growth and development. So if an employee says, hey, and they make a case that I really want to do this, it’s almost like we’re negotiating against ourselves. So I think if you can — one, I think it shows again the research and that you’re really interested and plugged into what the organization is doing — but then I think you’re leveraging the company against itself in some ways because you’re almost negotiating against well, yeah, we put these on the wall as something that we believe in. But we’re not going to support it or you know. Or at the very least, it plants a seed. And that’s what I say is sometimes with clients, we do strike out. It is hard to move the needle sometimes, but at least one, we’ve got an iteration under our belts where we are negotiation, and two, we’ve planted a seed with that employer — assuming that they took the job anyway — that says OK, these are things that are kind of important to me that we’re going to talk about again and things like that. So I think that’s huge.

Tim Ulbrich: Good stuff. So let’s talk about some tools that we can use for negotiation. And again, many of these are covered in more detail in the book and other resources, which we’ll link to in the show notes. I just want to hit on a few of these. Let’s talk about mirroring, accusation audits, and the importance of getting a “That’s right” while you’re in these conversations. And we’ll leave our listeners to dig deeper in some of the other areas. So talk to us about mirroring. What is it? And kind of give us the example and strategies of mirroring. 

Tim Baker: Yeah, and I would actually — Tim, what I would do is I would actually back up because I think probably one of the most important tools that are there I think is the calibrated question. So that’s one of the first things that he talks — and the reason, so what is a calibrated question? So a calibrated question is a question with really no fixed answer that gives the illusion of control. So the answer, however, is kind of constrained by that question. And you, the person that’s asking the question, has control of the conversation. So I give the example, when we moved into our house after we renovated it — so brand new house. I walk into my daughter’s room, I think she was 4 at the time, and she’s coloring on the wall in red crayons. And I’m from Jersey, so I say “crown” not “crayon.” And I look at her, and I say, “Olivia, why are you doing that?” And she sees how upset I am and mad and she just starts crying. And there’s no negotiation from there.

Tim Ulbrich: Negotiation over.

Tim Baker: There’s no exchange of information. So in an alternate reality, in an alternate reality, what I should have done is said, “Olivia, what caused you to do that?” So you’re basically blasting — instead of why — why is very accusatory — you’re like, the how and the what questions are good. So and of course she would say, “Well, Daddy, I ran out of paper, so the wall is the next best thing.” So the use of — and having these calibrated questions in your back pocket, I think again buys you some time and really I think frames the conversation with your counterpart well. So using words like “how” and “what” and avoiding things like “why,” “when,” “who.” So, “What about this works, doesn’t work for you?” “How can we make this better for us?” “How do you want to proceed?” “How can we solve this problem?” “What’s the biggest challenge you face?” These are all — “How does this look to you?” — these are all calibrated questions that again, as you’re kind of going back and forth, you can kind of lean on. So have good how and what questions. To kind of answer the question about mirroring, as you’re asking these questions, you’re mirroring your counterpart. So what mirroring, the scientific term is called isopraxism. But he defines and says “the real-life Jedi mind trick.” This causes vomiting of information is what he says. So you know, these are not the droids you’re looking for. So what you essentially is you repeat back the last 1-3 words or the critical words of your counterpart’s sentence, your counterpart’s sentence. So this is me mirroring myself. Yeah, well you want to repeat back because you want them to reveal more information. And you want to build rapport and have that curiosity of kind of what is the other person thinking so you can, again, come to an agreement. Come to an agreement? Yeah. So at the end of the day, the purpose — so this is mirroring. So I’ll show you a funny story. I practice this on my wife sometimes, who does not have a problem speaking. But sometimes the counterpart is —

Tim Ulbrich: She’s listening, by the way.

Tim Baker: Yeah, exactly. So I’ll probably be in trouble. But so I basically just for our conversation, just mirror back exactly what she’s saying. And you can do this physically. You can cross your legs or your arms or whatever that looks like. But what he talks about more is with words. And you know, I’ll basically just mirror back my wife, and she — at the end of the conversation, she’ll say something like, “Man, I feel like you really listened to me.” And I laugh about that because I’m just really repeating back. But if you think about it, I did. Because for you to be able to do that, you really do have to listen. So mirroring, again, if you’re just repeating back, you really start to uncover more of what your counterpart is thinking because often, like what comes out of our mouth the first or even second time is just smoke. So really uncovering that. One of the things he talks about is labeling where this is kind of the — it’s described as the method of validating one’s emotion by acknowledging it. So, “It seems like you’re really concerned about patient care. It seems like you’re really concerned about the organization’s retention of talent. So what you’re doing is that you’re using neutral statements that don’t involve the use of “I” or “we.” So it’s not necessarily accusatory. And then you are — same with the mirror. You really want to not step on your mirror. You want to not stop on your label and really invite the other person to say, “Yeah, I’m just really frustrated by this or that.” So labeling is really important to basically defuse the power, the negative emotion, and really allow you to remain neutral and kind of find out more about that. So that’s super important.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think with both of those, Tim, as you were talking, it connects well back to what we mentioned earlier of talk less, listen more. 

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: Like you’re really getting more information out, right, from a situation that can be guarded, you know, people are trying to be guarded. And I think more information could lead hopefully to a more fruitful negotiation. What about the accusation audit?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so the accusation audit, it’s one of my favorites, kind of similar with calibrated questions. I typically will tell clients, I’m like, “Hey, if you don’t learn anything from this, I would say have some calibrated questions in your back pocket and have a good accusation audit at the ready.” And we typically will use the accusation audit to kind of frame up a counteroffer. So it kind — so before I give you the example, the accusation audit is a technique that’s used to identify and label probably like the worst thing that your counterpart could say about it. So this is all the head trash that’s going on of why I don’t want to negotiate. It’s like, ah, they’re going to think that I’m overasking or I’m greedy, all those things that you’re thinking. So you’re really just pointing to the elephant in the room and you’re just trying to take this thing out and really let the air out of the room where a lot of people just get so nervous about this. So a good accusation audit is, “Hey, Tim, I really appreciate the offer of $100,000 to work with your organization. You’re probably going to think that I’m the greediest person on Planet Earth, but I was really looking for this to that.” 

Tim Ulbrich: That’s a great line. Great line.

Tim Baker: Or, “You’re probably thinking that I’m asking way too much,” or, “You’re probably thinking that I’m way underqualified for this position, but here’s what I’m thinking.”

Tim Ulbrich: “No. No, no, no, Tim.”

Tim Baker: Right. So when someone says that to me, I’m like, “No. I don’t think that.” And what often happens — and again, clients have told me this — what often happens is that the person, the counterpart that they’re working with, like they’re recruited as — one person said, one client was like, “Oh, we’re going to find you more money. We’re going to figure it out.” So they like — so when someone says that to you, just think about how you would feel. “Oh, I don’t think that at all.” And then it just kind of lets the air out of the room. So you basically preface your counteroffer with like the worst thing they could say about you, and then they typically say, “That’s not true at all.” 

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: So I love the accusation audit. So simple, it’s kind of easy to remember. And I think it just lays I think the groundwork for just great conversation and hopefully a resolution. 

Tim Ulbrich: That’s awesome. And then let’s wrap up with the goal of getting to a “That’s right.” I remember when I was listening to an interview with Chris Voss, this was a part that I heard and I thought, wow, that’s so powerful. If you can get — in the midst of this negotiation, if we can get to a “Yeah, that’s right,” the impact that could have on the impact. 

Tim Baker: Yeah, so he kind of talks about it like kind of putting all of these different tools together. So it’s mirroring and labeling and kind of using I think what he calls minimal encouragement, “Uh huh,” “I see,” kind of paraphrasing what you hear from your counterpart. And then really wait for — it’s like, “Hey, did I get that right? Am I tracking?” And what you’re really looking for is a “That’s right.” He said that’s even better than a “Yes.” So one of the examples I give is when I speak with prospective clients, we’re talking about my student loans and my investment portfolio and I’m doing real budgeting, and I got a sold a life insurance policy that I think isn’t great for me. And so we go through all of these different parts of the financial plan. And I’m basically summarizing back what they’re saying. And I say, you know, at the end of it — so I’m summarizing 30 minutes of conversation. And I’m saying, “Did I get that right?” And they’re like, “Yeah, that’s right. You’re a great listener,” which I have to record for my wife sometimes because she doesn’t agree with me. So that’s what you’re looking for is “Yeah, that’s right.” This person has heard, message sent, heard, understand me. He says if you get a “You’re right,” so sometimes, again, I keep talking about my wife, I’m like, “Hey, we have to do a better job of saving for retirement,” and she’s like, “You’re right.” That’s really code for “Shut up and go away.” So it’s a “That’s right” really what we’re looking for.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome.

Tim Baker: So that’s very powerful.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s great stuff. And really, just a great overall summary of some tips within the negotiation process, the steps of the negotiation process, how it fits into the financial plan. We hope folks walk away with that and just a good reminder of our comprehensive financial planning services that we do at YFP Planning. This is a great example of when we say “comprehensive,” we mean it. So it’s not just investments, it’s not just student loans. It’s really every part of the financial plan. Anything that has a dollar sign on it, we want our clients to be in conversation and working with our financial planners to make sure we’re optimizing that and looking at all parts of one’s financial plan. And here, negotiation is a good example of that. So we’ve referenced lots of resources, main one we talked about here today was “Never Split the Difference” by Chris Voss. We will link to that in our show notes. And as a reminder to access the show notes, you can go to YourFinancialPharmacist.com/podcast, find this week’s episode, click on that and you’ll be able to access a transcription of the episode as well as the show notes and the resources. And don’t forget to join our Facebook group, the Your Financial Pharmacist Facebook group, over 6,000 members strong, pharmacy professionals all across the country committed to helping one another on their own path and walk towards financial freedom. And last but not least, if you liked what you heard on this week’s episode of the podcast, please leave us a rating and review on Apple podcasts or wherever you listen to the show each and every week. Have a great rest of your day.

Tim Ulbrich: As we conclude this week’s podcast and important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacist unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the dates published.  Such information may contain forward looking statements, which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 333: Small Business Owner Tax Savings Checklist


On this episode, sponsored by First Horizon, YFP Director of Tax, Sean Richards CPA, EA, summarizes a tax checklist for pharmacy entrepreneurs and other small business owners.

Episode Summary

Too many of us are caught in the trap of only looking at taxes during tax season. As a small business owner, missing the tax mark can have significant consequences in the form of surprise payments due, missed deductions and credits, and constantly wondering if there is something else you should be doing. So whether you are a seasoned business owner or just starting, on this week’s episode, sponsored by First Horizon, YFP Director of Tax, Sean Richards, CPA, EA walks us through a small business owner tax checklist including eight key areas that demand your attention. He touches on the fundamentals of bookkeeping, qualified deductible expenses, the benefits of financial projections to make estimated payments, the significance of S Corp status, insights on determining your owner’s compensation, and much more.

Key Points From the Episode

  • A warm welcome back to the show to YFP’s Director of Tax and CPA, Sean Richards. 
  • Why record keeping is vital for a smooth tax season. 
  • The separation of church and state when it comes to personal business. 
  • Why you shouldn’t fear registering your business as an LLC. 
  • When to consider working with a professional and what to expect from the relationship. 
  • Understanding the basics of bookkeeping. 
  • Defining deductible expenses and why it’s important to understand this term. 
  • The difference between tax planning and tax preparation.
  • Projections and estimated payments: making sure that you’re setting the right money aside. 
  • How to determine if the S-Corp is the right fit for you.
  • Discussing payroll and how to establish your salary as a business owner. 
  • Diving deeper into Section 179 deductibles.

Episode Highlights

“Working with a professional will not solve any challenges or problems you have with disorganization.” — Tim Ulbrich [0:16:01]

“Having a strong understanding of how your business is doing financially is one of the best things that you can do as a business owner.” — Sean Richards [0:17:44]

“Paying yourself an equitable salary is not only the right thing to do by the eyes of the IRS, but it also really helps you think about where the business going and growing.” — Tim Ulbrich [0:45:48]

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[0:00:00.8] TU: Hey everyone, I’m Tim Ulbrick, and I want to express my gratitude for you tuning in this week to the YFP Podcast. Each and every week, we’re dedicated to providing inspiration and support on your journey towards achieving financial freedom. 

On this week’s episode, we have a special guest joining us, that’s YFP’s director of tax and CPA, Sean Richards, here to dive into a crucial topic, a tax checklist for small business owners. Whether you’re a seasoned business owner or just starting out, we’ll explore eight key areas that demand your attention. We’ll touch on the fundamentals of bookkeeping, qualified deductible expenses, the benefits of financial projections for estimated payments, the significance of S-Corp status, insights on determining your owner’s compensation, and much more.

Before we dive into this insightful conversation, let’s take a moment to thank today’s sponsor, First Horizon. Afterward, we’re jumping to my conversation with Sean Richards.

[SPONSOR MESSAGE]

[0:00:53.6] TU: Does saving 20% for a down payment on a home feel like an uphill battle? It’s no secret that pharmacists have a lot of competing financial priorities, including high student loan debt, meeting that saving 20% for a down payment on a home may take years. 

We’ve been on a hunt for a solution for pharmacists that are ready to purchase a home loan with a lower down payment and are happy to have found that option with First Horizon. First Horizon offers a professional home loan option, AKA, doctor or pharmacist home loan, that requires a 3% down payment for a single-family home or townhome for first-time home buyers, has no PMI, and offers a 30-year fixed rate mortgage on home loans up to USD 726,200.

The pharmacist home loan is available in all states except Alaska and Hawaii and can be used to purchase condos as well. However, rates may be higher and a condo review has to be completed. To check out the requirements for First Horizon’s Pharmacist Home Loan, and to start the pre-approval process, visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/home-loan. Again, that’s yourfinancialpharmacist.com/home-loan.

[INTERVIEW]

[0:02:04.9] TU: Sean, welcome back to the show.

[0:02:06.5] SR: Thanks. Thanks for having me, yeah. Feels good, we’re through all the extension deadlines, business and individual and now we can hundred percent focus on next year. 

[0:02:14.2] TU: Hard to believe, right? We’re already talking about next tax season. You just had a webinar this week kicking off the beginnings of at least thinking about tax season. I know, many of our listeners, really, this comes to life in January, February, we’re trying to get people to think a little bit earlier, more year-round, and today, we’re focusing on really small business owner tax considerations and what are some things that people will be thinking about, planning about. 

Essentially, a checklist of sorts, and whether people are just getting started with a business or maybe they’ve been at it for a while and they can go back and see, “All right, maybe there’s some holes in the crack in the foundation that they need to go back and fill in.” We really hope that this can be an episode that people will come back and reference into the future as well of something they need to be thinking about as a small business owner as it relates to their taxes.

And Sean, we’re going to talk here and weave in some of our own personal experiences of how these things became obvious that we need to be doing as we’re growing the business but also, Sean, in the work that you’re doing and advising and working with other small business owners as well.

[0:03:15.2] SR: Yeah, there will be anecdotes from real life, with our own accounting of our own businesses and some of the people that we worked with and everything, yeah. There’s a lot in this one, I think it will be a good one to reference back to, I agree.

[0:03:25.9] TU: I know pharmacists like checklists and I know they like to know where we’re going. So, we’re going to cover eight different areas, we’ll go through these one by one and they’re really going to flow into one another, and so I think we’re going to start, maybe a little bit broader, Sean, and then we’ll get more narrow of considerations that folks should be thinking about.

Sean, number one on our list is record keeping. I think that anyone who has been in a business for any time or even if they’ve been thinking about starting, they’re being advised, maybe that’s – some advice have been given is, “Hey, you have to keep records,” But that can get lost, right? You’ve got an idea, you’re running things, it can be busy, tell us about record keeping, why it’s so important, and what people should be thinking about here.

[0:04:02.5] SR: Yeah, like you said, these will kind of flow into each other, and honestly, it’s – you kind of can’t have one of these items without what’s before it, and it all comes back to record keeping, really, at the end of the day. And that makes sense if you’re thinking about taxes and accounting just the way that they are. It’s generally, it’s the nature or say, looking back at something, it’s a historical look. 

So, you’re going to need to have references of the things that you did to be able to do something like that, but there’s just so many things that go into just being able to make decisions about your business when you’re filing taxes at the end of the year, when you’re doing tax planning, which I’ll get into a little bit later about the differences between tax planning and tax preparation. 

It all comes down to having good data, and having good data goes back to having good sourced data and inputs and everything. So just saving down everything that you can, related to the business, and I don’t mean that in the sense of just holding receipts and throwing it in the shoe box and just keeping all of the junk, but just making sure that if you’re doing financial transactions, you’re keeping them in a bank related to your business, you’re running down reports at the end of the month. 

Hopefully, you’re using some kind of ledger system like a QuickBooks or even Excel or something like that but even if not, just being able to say, “Hey, this is the money that I made this year, this is the money I paid this year.” And then even some of the ins and outs that you might not think or something that will directly relate to your taxes or business but might, if you ask your accountant about it, right? 

So, things like loan agreements and any type of employment agreements you have with folks. So, things like that. Just really, anything that you think at any point in time, “Hey, would my accountant ever possibly ask me about this?” or “May this possibly come into play when I’m doing my taxes in the future?” Bear to error on the set of caution, just keep everything. 

That being said, there’s actually some rules in some areas. So, generally speaking, I’d hold on to everything for at least three years. Some states have even longer record retention requirements but generally speaking, hold on to things for at least three years. Just get some cloud storage or a hard drive or something like that so you don’t have to take a physical space and just keep an eye on everything.

[0:06:08.1] TU: Yeah. And we use, at YFP, we use Google Drive for everything. So that becomes our system of – as you mentioned Sean, it’s not just receipts, right? It’s going to be the financial statements, whether someone’s producing those for you or you’re working on that yourself, and it might be a very basic Excel template that you’re starting with and then that will evolve over time. 

But it’s not just the receipts or the financials, it’s also the contracts, right? Things that you’re – you know, W9. I mean, just the – a lot of things that you’re going to be building over time.

[0:06:37.0] SR: Right, and even things that you might not think about. So, like, say you or you have an office space at home that you’re working out of. You can take a deduction for that and there’s a simplified way to do that with a square footage. But there’s also a way you can take actual expenses and generally, you’re going to want to do whatever is the most beneficial.

So, now we’re talking about, okay, mortgage interest and utilities and stuff but even on top of that, depreciations. So now we’re saying, “Hey, how much did you pay for your house 10 years ago?” or something. That might not be something that’s top of mind for folks but if it’s, again, even if it’s tangentially related to the business, there’s a chance you’re going to be able to possibly get a tax savings for it. 

Better to just hold onto it and ask somebody about it, “Hey, can I get a deduction for this? Is it worth me keeping this data, these records here?” And then just have someone tell you, “No, you don’t need that anymore.” And then you can get rid of it.

[0:07:26.2] TU: Yeah, perhaps I should have said this at the beginning, Sean, but I know we’re going to have some people that are listening that maybe have been at this for a while and they’re kind of realizing as we’re going through these eight things like, “Oh, my gosh, like, this is a hot mess” right?

[0:07:35.9] SR: Right.

[0:07:36.6] TU: And that’s normal. You joked about the receipts in the shoe box but there’s a fine line here between, “You can’t predict everything you don’t know yet.” And the system’s going to evolve over time. You don’t want to become paralyzed by all these things but also, you want to be thinking ahead as much as you possibly can, or working with someone that can help you anticipate, that has experience working with others as well.

[0:07:56.6] SR: Exactly.

[0:07:57.4] TU: And I think an important part of that record-keeping, Sean, has been moved to number two on our checklist is this concept of comingling personal and business and really wanting to separate these out and ideally, we’re doing this from jump street, right? So we can have clean records and again, this isn’t always done, whether someone’s anticipating where they’re going to go or maybe they’re confused about how to incorporate or do they need to set up an LLC.

Lots of things to consider here, but talk to us about the importance of separation of church and state when it comes to personal business.

[0:08:29.5] SR: I was going to say the separation of church and state but I wasn’t sure if that was alright. So, I’ve used it before but I held off for a minute. Yeah, I mean, that again, it’s going back to the record-keeping thing, and being able to produce data and produce useful information about your business. So, if you need to say to yourself, “All right, how much money did I make this year or how much did I make, how much did I spend in expenses to my vendors?”

If you have to then go and start pouring through and combing through bank accounts and picking out, “All right, well, this was related to my kid’s school stuff but this was related to the business trip that I went on” and everything, just the notion of even having to do that from the beginning is – it’s just stressful to even think about. There were legal sides to it too. I mean, if you have an LLC and you set up a separate business, it’s always kind of there to keep things separate.

[0:09:15.8] TU: Yeah.

[0:09:16.0] SR: Then it begins to become something where, like you said, you might not know at first, “Hey, I’m starting something out, it’s just a little side project, I’ll use my regular account for now and kind of keep track of things on paper.” Then all of a sudden, things expand and get bigger and hey, maybe you’re incorporating or bringing on partners and stuff, and then you start getting into things, which I won’t really go too deep into because I’ll put the audience to sleep.

But you start talking about your basis in a partnership interest or something like that or your basis as a shareholder in a corporation, and if you’re sharing funds or borrowing things from here and putting it in this pocket and using your personal home equity line of credit to fund the line of business that you’re doing, it just, it muddies the waters too much from the beginning.

So, to any extent, you can keep that stuff separate. That’s the recommendation. That being said, number one is, if you’ve already done some things where, “Hey, I’ve put a couple of expenses on this card” it’s not the end of the world, it’s just being able to identify those things. So, if you can go back now and start to be able to put a report together where you’re chipping away the personal stuff and you have the business stuff ready now or towards the end of the year and not in April or March actually, if we’re talking about business returns.

But the other thing is that you don’t have to necessarily hold yourself to that a million percent. And I know this is offering up not a best practice but there will be times when I have people come to me and say, “Hey, if I go put this big credit card or this big flight on my personal card that I just opened up, I’m going to get myself a huge refund back from my credit or big reward, then I’ll be able to put back in the business” or something like that.

Those things will happen and it makes sense, you have to do it. It just goes back to the record-keeping thing. Let your accountant know or keep track yourself. “Hey, this was a loan from me as a business owner to the business and now, I’m going to actually pay myself back that amount from my business account.” Just keep track of it that way. Don’t completely handcuff yourself but make sure you try to keep things as separate as you possibly can.

[0:11:19.3] TU: Yeah, that’s great stuff. I think too, there’s – you mentioned some of the legal piece, which again, we’re not lawyers but that’s an important consideration of keeping things separate and where the liability protection ends. I think the other thing I see here, Sean, often, is the idea of starting, setting up a business, registering with the state, getting your employer identification number, opening a bank account. 

That seems big and scary, which I think can be intimidating to people that are on the front of it but it’s really not that difficult nor is it that expensive. And so I think, as early as you possibly can, once you’ve got that bank account and the business’s name that’s really going to help you with the record-keeping being separate. The other thing I would just say is from a visibility and a cleanliness as an owner to understanding where your business is at. 

Like, we don’t want to muddy those waters as you talked about, right? So, I want to be able to quickly see, how’s the revenue, how’s the expenses, where are we at? And obviously as you grow, you’re going to look at this period versus another period and what’s the growth or not the growth. What do we need to change?

So, I think really having good insight into what’s the health of the business, the separation helps. And then the other thing I would add, which is a little bit more in the mindset side of things is sometimes when we are just starting, we have some of that resistance and devastation of like, “Well, this is just kind of small and I’m not sure where it’s going to go and so, I’m just going to do it with my personal.” 

Like, believe in yourself, right? Where are we going? And worst-case scenario as we dissolve the business, we shut down the banking account and we move on, but I think really establishing the goals that you have for the business as well.

[0:12:49.4] SR: Right, and we’ll talk about it in a little bit more later but the LLC thing, again, neither of us are lawyers but a lot of people get scared by that because they think, “Oh, it’s a new entity, it’s going to open up this whole separate tax thing.” But most of the time, if you’re a sole proprietorship and you open an LLC, it’s just going to land on your personal tax return like kind of a regular side business anyways. So don’t let that notion of things scare you too much.

[0:13:12.1] TU: All right, number three on our list, Sean. Number three is working with a professional. You’ve alluded to this a couple of different times. Some people, as it gets started, they may work with a professional right away, they may wait, and that could either be an accountant, bookkeeper, both, we’ll talk about bookkeeping basics here in a little bit. 

This was one of the first areas, Sean, that we actually outsourced at YFP, as we were looking at growing the business. We had times where that perspective was very helpful and times where we’re like, maybe not. So, I think this is a challenge where, “You know what? I’m going to hire someone that can really understand my business and advise me.” And I often had this feeling of, “I don’t know what I don’t know”, right? 

So, I’m looking for someone to kind of guide me, rather than just being there when I have questions. So, talk to us about the working with the professional. Maybe the “When”, as well as, what are we looking for in that relationship?

[0:14:01.8] SR: Yeah, and like you mentioned, we’re going to go into bookkeeping basics, but I think having this n your checklist of where you’re in the end of the year, and really any point in the business year is trying to make that determination, “Hey, am I going to do this or not?” You don’t even necessarily have to go down the path of understanding all of the ins and outs of the bookkeeping if you’re going to decide off the bat, “Hey, I’m going to pay somebody to do that for me.” 

Not that you shouldn’t get the basics and stuff, but if you’re going to say, “Hey, I want to outsource this now and have somebody run that whole show”, you don’t necessarily even have to get yourself in the weeds from the beginning. But I think it’s just one of those things that you have to decide, like you were saying, where do you want to be spending your time and your energy and where are your strengths and your weaknesses, right? 

So, if maybe you have a finance background and you say, “I can put a couple of hours towards this and it’s not a big deal, I got a pretty good handle on things and I can run it myself.” That’s perfectly fine but you might be saying to yourself, “Hey, I know a lot of people who just absolutely hate everything to do with numbers” and that’s okay too. If number scare you and you hate numbers, that’s fine but they’re not going to go away. 

So, ignoring them or trying to just say, “Hey, we’ll get there at the end of the year and figure it out then.” I mean, that is one way to do it but it’s certainly not the best way to do it. So, I think it’s just something where you have to really think about where you’re at, what your strengths and weaknesses are, and also what do you want to do when it comes to tax season, right? 

If you’re talking about a sole proprietorship then that’s going to land on your personal return, that’s probably something that you can handle. But if you’re getting into partnerships and corporations, now you’re filing different returns and they’re a little bit more than a regular person’s probably used to with HNR block or whatever. So, that’ might begin to necessitate having a tax professional just sheerly out of expertise. 

So, there’s a lot of different things. I always use the accountant cop-out answer that Tim Baker uses of, “It depends.” But it really does depend. But I think having that decision early on in your process will help plan out the rest of everything else that we’re going to talk about in a minute.

[0:15:57.6] TU: And this is worth saying, and maybe saying again and saying again, which is working with a professional will not solve any challenges or problems you have with disorganization, right?

[0:16:07.7] SR: Correct.

[0:16:08.6] TU: They can advise, they can help, they can – we talked about things like record keeping, but they’re not there from an organization standpoint. I think this is something, again, no judgment, right? People that are just getting started in the business, you’re focusing on the business, you’re growing things, you may not be thinking about organization and records and all that, but at some point, that’s got to become a priority. And if they’re working with someone the first time, that may not be something that is top of mind, so.

[0:16:32.7] SR: Yeah, but a professional though also can, on the flip side and again, it’s not going to be – it’s not going to solve disorganization problems but can definitely help advise with, “Hey, you’ve been struggling keeping track of all these things. Why don’t you get a QuickBooks subscription, we’ll connect all your bank accounts and then I can handle things from there and keep track of things as they come in.” 

And now, all of a sudden, you’re not panicking every month or every year with the thousand transactions. You have a bookkeeper who is going in every week or every month and categorizing things and sending you reports, so. 

[0:17:01.9] TU: Yeah.

[0:17:02.1] SR: Again, it might not solve your problems with a wave of a magic wand but they can definitely get you there.

[0:17:08.7] TU: So, let’s go to number four on our small business owner tax checklist, and Sean, that’s bookkeeping. We’ve danced around this here a couple of times so far but whether or not someone is working with a bookkeeper, there are things they have to be ready for and make sure that they’re tracking. So, talk to us about those items that they have to be ready to report on, whether they’re doing it themselves or whether they’re working with someone that they hire.

[0:17:30.5] SR: Yup, like you said, and like I was just saying before too, even if you have somebody who is doing this for you, reporting on it, and kind of explaining it all to you, you still have to generally be able to understand what they’re talking about, right? I mean, you can only break things down in layman’s terms so much, and having a strong understanding of how your business is doing financially is obviously, one of the best things that you can do as a business owner, I think.

So, if you take a look at – and I’ll talk about the entity types in a little bit – but if you look at the three main, or at least in my mind, tax returns that you’ll have for small businesses typically is a schedule C on your 1040. That’s just your regular kind of sole proprietorship. It can be an LLC, cannot, but just a regular person side gig kind of thing, and then you have a 1065 which is a partnership. 

So that’s the default if you have an LLC and you have more than one person, and then S-Corp, I’m sure a lot of people have heard of that say, 1120-s. Those are the three main forms that you typically see for filing business returns at the end of the year. If you look at the three of those, the main front of the forms, they’re all basically the same thing. You have your revenues, your, “Hey, what were my sales, what was my service income if I had any other kind of income, and what were my expenses?”

And you’ll see that all three of them have generally the same categories for expenses. Like advertising and travel and mortgage interest and things like that. So, it’s pretty similar across the board and you’re going to really have to be able to report on that stuff, no matter what kind of business you run, you’re going to have to know what your revenues are and you’re going to have to know what your expenses are.

Revenues, I’m not really going to spend a whole heck of a lot of time on. I mean, I think people generally kind of have a feel for that, it’s cash in the door. The one thing I would say there is if you’re doing service revenue, it might be a little bit harder to track when you’re actually performing a service and getting paid versus actually selling a good. So, a little bit more keep eye on there but honestly, again, people typically have a good feel for that.

It’s more the expense side that I think things can kind of trip people up on. You typically think, “Hey, whenever I’m spending cash out the door that’s going to be an expense for the business and I can probably deduct it.” And generally, that’s true, but there’s a lot of things that come in that can mix that up a little bit. I mean, property is one thing. I was mentioning before, depreciation, right? 

So, you probably think, “Hey, I’m paying for this office space and I have a mortgage on it. My mortgage, I should be able to write that off, right?” Mortgage interest you can but the mortgage principle, you don’t. You get that back via depreciation but again, that’s something you might not be thinking about or might not really have insight into, or vehicles for example. You can have a billion different ways to write off vehicle expenses. 

Whether you’re taking actual expenses or like a standard mileage rate. It all depends on how much you’re using the vehicle for business purposes, there’s all sorts of depreciation rules and stuff. There’s just a lot when it comes to expenses. So, that’s probably the biggest area on the PNL at least, the profit and loss statement to really have a good handle on when it comes to basic bookkeeping stuff.

[0:20:25.4] TU: Sean, as you’re talking, it’s reminding me of – sorry to interrupt you, it’s reminding me of Schitt’s Creek episode where Johnny Rose – 

[0:20:33.4] SR: Yeah. I already know where this is going.

[0:20:35.0] TU: You can’t just buy things for yourself and deduct them as an expense.

[0:20:39.8] SR: It’s a write-off, it’s just a write-off, exactly.

[0:20:42.1] TU: It’s a write-off, just a write-off.

[0:20:43.4] SR: And hey, a lot of times, and we’ll talk about what’s a deductible business expense. A lot of times, if you’re spending money on a business, it is but you’re correct, you can’t just be like David Rose and just go buy everything.

[0:20:54.3] TU: Oh my gosh.

[0:20:55.7] SR: From the blouse barn. So, that’s the PNL. The balance sheet is kind of – I don’t want to say, it’s the ugly stepchild of the financial statements but it’s the one that people generally have an actually have a pretty good understanding of it without even really knowing what a balance sheet is just because of the nature of two of the biggest components of it. So, your balance sheet is going to be your assets, it’s kind of one-half of the calculation and then the other half is liabilities and equity. 

So, assets are pretty much what you think. If you look up the book definition of an asset, it’s kind of what it is for a business. It’s kind of what it is for a business. It’s basically something that’s expected to generate money for you, it’s a positive sort of resource that you have so cash, receivables, things like that, property, equipment. Again, things that people probably have a pretty good handle on.

“Hey, I have this much cash in the bank, Johnny owes me this much money and I own all these cars” right? Liabilities is the other side, on the other side. So, that’s the opposite of the asset basically. It’s like, “Hey, loans, do I have debt, do I have credit cards, do I have a mortgage? Do I owe my vendors?” Things like that.

So again, people typically have a pretty good handle of that, whether they’re really thinking about it or not, you usually know, “Hey, what are my credit card balances, what’s my line of credit balance?” whatever. Equity is the piece that is sort of – it always just ends up being the plug piece but it’s really important when it comes to taxes. So, if you think about – I was alluding to before, you were in a partnership.

You have a basis in that partnership and again, if you’re not an accountant, you might be thinking like, “What in the world is that?” It’s something that, I don’t want to say it gets overlooked but if you’re not really thinking about it from the beginning and again, getting back to commingling funds and stuff, basis is something that really matters a lot in the tax calculation. But can get muddied very quickly if you don’t have a handle on things. 

And that really comes into play, equity is really where that kind of lands and I’ll caution that, if you look on the balance sheet, you look at equity, that doesn’t mean that that’s your basis or if you have multiple partners and stuff, it doesn’t necessarily equal that. But being able to have a handle on what your equity is, it really is a value of your company if you think about it. It’s your assets minus your liabilities. If everything right now came due and you had to pay off all of your vendors and everything, what do you have left? 

That’s the value for your business. So, like I said, it’s the one that’s overlooked a little bit and it’s not as easy to maintain. Typically you don’t have to report a balance sheet if you have a small business and you’re doing like sole proprietorship or something, but it’s something that if you can get somebody to keep those books for you and be able to have a handle on it.

[0:23:28.2] TU: So, as you mentioned, assets equals liabilities plus equity or we could change the equation around assets minus liabilities equals equity, right?

[0:23:35.6] SR: Again, exactly right.

[0:23:36.6] TU: So, is my high school math still good?

[0:23:38.4] SR: Yes, that would be algebra. Very, very good. 

[0:23:41.2] TU: So, let’s talk more within the bookkeeping basics here. Let’s talk more about the deductible expenses, right? This is probably one of the most common questions that we get you alluded to before that – especially early on the journey, people may have this perception of, “Hey, I can buy anything for the businesses and it’s a deductible expense.” So, define that term just a little bit further and why that’s important, and then some of the most common areas or deductible expenses that small business owners should be thinking about.

[0:24:06.8] SR: Yup. Sure. So, deductibility, it really comes down to the main things. So, is it ordinary and necessary? So, that basically means, if I have a business, is that expense something that actually makes sense in the course of a business? So, if you own a financial education company and you’re buying courses for your employees to take to learn about education and finance and stuff, that’s probably an ordinary expense.

If you’re buying tickets to – I was going to say, the Phillies in the World Series but they’re not really there, I guess. So, if you’re buying tickets to a baseball game or something, that’s probably not an ordinary expense, right? So, sorry for the low blow. I actually was rooting for the Phillies this year, that wasn’t meant to be, it just popped in my head first thing. So, ordinary necessaries, number one. Reasonable, which is in the same kind of vein but similar sort of thing.

So right, if we go back to that example I was just giving in, your employees are purchasing education, financial education courses, right? If those courses cost USD 500, a thousand dollars or something, it’s probably reasonable. If those courses cost USD 250,000 each, that’s starting to be, “Hey, you know, what’s going on there?” In fact, it’s probably not started to be, it’s definitely unreasonable but I think you get what I’m saying.

[0:25:19.3] TU: Yeah. 

[0:25:19.3] SR: And then the third piece is paid during the year or if you’re on the accrual basis incurred during the year. But generally speaking paid but as the case is with everything, there is a lot of exceptions to these rules and with expenses in particular, those exceptions come out quite a bit. So, when we think common deductible expenses, cost of goods sold is going to be the most common or easy to identify if you’re a retail business or you’re selling goods. 

And then the flip side of that, of the analogy I guess is if you have a service business, it’s not as easy to say, “What’s my cost of goods sold?” because you’re not selling a good but being able to determine, “Hey, what are my direct expenses directly related to the services that I’m providing?” So, it’s typically labor, contract labor, things like that. Compensation, so that’s one that is usually is a deductible expense. 

However, it very often is not something that’s a deductible expense if it’s for an owner-employee of whatever this is. So, and you know, I’ll get into a little bit of specifics in a bit with some of these different entity types but if you’re a sole proprietorship and you are paying yourself and it is a little bit contradictory to what I was saying before where you want to be able to kind of keep good books and keep records of everything. 

So, you’re probably saying, “All right, I’m working 40 hours a week on my business. I am paying myself 50 grand a year” whatever it is, that’s a salary expense to me, and then you write that off. But as an owner of a sole proprietorship, that’s not something that’s a deductible expense and that comes into play if you’re S-Corp. Some of those, some of the compensation that you’re getting. 

If it is a salary expense, that will be deductible but then if you’re taking profit distributions, it’s not. So, there is a lot when it comes into compensation. If you’re paying contractors, separate contractors that aren’t yours generally speaking, that will be deductible but more just trying to give the caution flag here of, “Hey, if you are paying anybody particularly yourself, keep an eye on that.” 

[0:27:15.7] TU: That’s really good, Sean. I think that can evolve, right? So, somebody may start as a sole proprietor, they may then have partners or not, they may or may not become an S-Corp. So, this topic of owner’s compensation and a deductible expense is one that may be ongoing. 

[0:27:30.3] SR: Oh, absolutely. It’s something – and we’ll talk about the S-Corp thing in a little bit – but exactly right. And that’s not something that is going to be set in stone and even something like not necessarily related to deductible expenses, but even something like setting aside money for taxes. I mean, you might have a rate in your head that, “Hey, I’m going to put aside 15, 20%” that can change drastically year to year depending on what things are happening with your business or your personal. 

[0:27:52.9] TU: Yeah. 

[0:27:53.3] SR: So just another thing that as with everything else, a lot of these rules and things to keep in mind aren’t necessarily set in stone for any particular point in time. On the subject of compensation, health insurance is another big one. So, that’s one that again, you got to really want to be careful about. I can’t get into all the rules now but the big thing there is really if your spouse is eligible for health insurance through whatever company they work for. 

If it’s unrelated to your small business that usually makes it nondeductible on your side, so just something to keep in mind in there. Again, I won’t go into everything but there is a lot of rules around health insurance. Travel, a lot of rules around that. So, if you’re going on business and you are spending time overnight and the primary purpose is for business, most of those expenses generally speaking will be deductible. 

But if it’s for leisure, probably not and the big one with transportation and travel is commuting to and from your office is never deductible. That’s the big one there that people will say, “Well, what if I work from home sometimes but then I have an office space that I go to?” If that’s a primary office location, probably not going to be a deductible expense, so that’s a big one to keep in mind.

And that’s huge too when you’re thinking about, if I am buying a vehicle and I’m taking these depreciation deductions and stuff, the mileage that you’re commuting to and from your office does not count towards business mileage, so very important to keep in mind. 

[0:29:14.6] TU: You’ve reminded me of that many times, which is good. 

[0:29:17.5] SR: Yeah, yeah, probably in a good way, right? 

[0:29:20.2] TU: Yes, yeah. 

[0:29:20.9] SR: And then you’re rolling your eyes at me kind of way. 

[0:29:22.5] TU: Yeah. 

[0:29:23.2] SR: So, one item I’ll mention as far as the exceptions to the rules I was talking about with being paid during the year is rent. So, I know a lot of people will say, “Oh, perfect. December, I’ll prepay next year’s rent and just be able to take a nice deduction this year for it.” IRS caught onto that one pretty quickly, so rent they actually specifically say, “Hey, if you prepay it, you can only take deductions for the time that it applies to.” 

And then a big one that I mentioned before is the business use of home. So, if you are using a home office space and you’re – it’s dedicated and you’re using that for your business, you usually can’t take a deduction for that and there’s two methods, a simplified, “Hey, what’s my square footage?” and you’re taking five bucks a square foot or you’re taking a percentage of your actual expenses for your home. 

The big thing there though is that I think that I kind of alluded to, it has to be strictly dedicated to that business. So, not like a half office half bedroom kind of situation. It needs to be fully for the business and really – 

[0:30:20.4] TU: Which is important with work-at-home transitions. I’m thinking about where people have bedroom office type of set up, so. 

[0:30:28.0] SR: Yeah and I mean, really, I mean I hit a couple of the big ones there as far as the expenses that are nondeductible that people often think might be. It’s really just; think of the opposite of what I just said, right? So, if you are you’re on and it’s for personal purposes, if you’re driving to and from your office, you’re going to baseball games, entertainment expenses aren’t deductible. 

Federal income tax too, that’s another big one that people think, “Hey, it’s a tax.” Alot of taxes are deductible, property taxes, estate taxes, but the Federal one itself it’s – that would be a circular reference. 

[0:31:00.3] TU: Yes, they were in. 

[0:31:00.8] SR: That they were able to, right? So, if you get that one, then your math’s definitely working nice.

[0:31:05.0] TU: Yeah. Well, I think this is an area and obviously, I’m biased, Sean, we’ve got a team that does this, and your expertise on our team knows how to do small business accounting and bookkeeping and fractional CFO and TAx 4. Obviously, I’m biased there but I think you have to ask yourself as a business owner like this is just a lot to have on your mind, right? 

So, could you learn all this, could you DIY this, could you record keep, could you bookkeep? Like technically the answer is yes. 

[0:31:31.8] SR: Right and it’s possible.

[0:31:33.2] TU: But as you think about your capacity of attention and where you need to be focusing your energy, there is a point where there’s just so many nuances and here we’re really talking more on the side of let’s make sure we’re not calling something deductible that’s nondeductible. I think really the next level is more of the, what can we be doing strategically to optimize our tax situation? And that’s a huge value of having someone in your corner. 

I do want to pause for a moment, I will be remised Sean, if I didn’t explain the Phillies reference to our listeners. 

[0:32:05.6] SR: Okay, all right, that’s fair. 

[0:32:06.8] TU: So, if our listeners don’t know, Sean’s in New Hampshire but he’s a huge Boston sports guy, and just in the past week, Tim Baker’s Phillies were eliminated from the NLCS and I assume as a Red Sox fan, that’s just beaming with joy, right? You’re a Red Sox fan. 

[0:32:23.6] SR: You know, I am a Red Sox fan but honestly, with the Phillies this year, I kind of thought it was a team of destiny sort of thing, I’ll root against a Philadelphia team if they’re going up against the Boston team because I mean it’s the in-law sort of thing. And you know if it’s the 76ers, I don’t like because they’re in conference and stuff but the Phillies, it’s NLAL, I actually was pulling for them. So, I was rooting for them by that one but at the same time, it’s a little bit of win-win. 

[0:32:50.4] TU: But the other thing why Sean is having a good week is I think the listeners know me, I’m a huge Buffalo Bill’s fan, and the New England Patriots miraculously beat the Buffalo Bills this week so.

[0:32:58.8] SR: Yes, which the term miraculous wouldn’t really have made sense for the last 20 or so years but now, it definitely does. So yeah, it’s been a good week but I think I’ll be crashing back down to reality this weekend, so we’ll see. 

[0:33:09.5] TU: Only the Buffalo Bills hand, Bill Belichick a milestone win, so I’m going to leave at that. All right, number five on our list is projections, estimated payments, making sure we’re setting money aside. I’m guessing if we have listeners that have been at this for a while, they’ll probably remember maybe an early part of their journey where it’s like, “Oh, I didn’t think about that” right? 

Didn’t know how to make estimate payments, didn’t think about how much I should set aside, and how I should project that. So, who needs to be making quarterly payments and talk to us about the process of determining that and then setting aside those dollars in planning? 

[0:33:43.8] SR: Yep, so I mean doing a projection, it all kind of comes back to what I was talking about way the beginning of this saying the difference between tax planning and tax preparation. So tax preparation, I actually always use the same analogy, I’ll use it again but I always think of tax planning as being like a film director who can sort of see things as they’re going with the actors and change course and say, “Hey, cut, re-film that, do this over.” 

And then tax preparation is the film editor who gets all the stuff and still plays an important role, works their magic, makes it all look nice. But it’s all stuff that’s already been done and you can’t turn back time and re-film any of those things, right? So, all of the kinds of theme of this entire conversation has been the idea of tax planning and actually being able to project what you think your liability is going to be at the end of the year.

And that’s where you start to get into what you’re just talking about, now we’re not talking about, “Hey, what is and what isn’t deductible” but now it can look at, “Hey, where do we have opportunities to take advantage of tax code and make a purchase and take advantage of accelerated depreciation or change our entity classification or something?” But in order to do that, you need to be able to do a projection. 

In order to be able to do a projection, you need to have books and in order to have books, you have records. So, you see how it all kind of works itself up, right? 

[0:35:00.9] TU: Yeah. 

[0:35:01.4] SR: But yeah, I mean, a projection, I think the biggest thing there, so it all comes down to what your tax classification is. So, if it’s Schedule C, you’re kind of looking at what you expect your profit and loss to be at the end of the year and you’re building that into your 1040 and then similarly, if you’re a chair holder of even an S-Corp or partnership or something, you’re going to get your distributed share of that income on a K1 at the end of the year. 

That’s going to come into your tax return, so it’s a little bit of – most of the time it’s thinking more about the tax on your personal side and less so on the business side. A lot of small businesses actually are passed through entities, where the business itself was not paying the tax, it’s actually the owners or the shareholders. So, when I say tax planning for your business, it actually is really a little bit more tax explaining on the personal side. 

But how does my business play into that and the biggest piece there is that usually small businesses will be subject to self-employment income, number one. And number two is that almost always business income won’t have any withholdings associated. 

[0:36:00.4] TU: Yeah. 

[0:36:00.8] SR: So, that’s when you need to start thinking about, “Do I have to make estimated payments? Should I be setting money aside at the end of the year?” So, there’s ways to do that, I mean again, doing a projection and really kind of you know, projection is kind of what it sounds like, you’re basically building a tax return now just with what you think it’s going to end at the end of the year. 

So doing that is good and then that will get you, “Hey, this is what I think my tax bill is going to be and this is what I think my withholdings are going to be” and everything and if you think you’re going to owe more than a thousand dollars, you should be making estimated payments, that’s the general rule. There’s something called the safe harbor, so the easy calc there, the easiest way to do it and being ultra-conservative as accountants tend to is take last year’s tax liability and multiply it by 110%, 1.1. 

And as long as you pay that in by the end of the year through withholdings and/or estimated payments or some kind of combination, then you won’t have any penalties. You can also do that with this year’s 90% of this year’s tax. But if you can – what I’m getting out with that, that’s not a known number, your last year’s tax liability is on your – 

[0:37:04.6] TU: More conservative, yeah. 

[0:37:05.5] SR: This year’s tax liability, you probably have a good handle on it but it could change, right?

[0:37:09.8] TU: Especially if you’re growing or there – just thinking about variability and this is another example, just a peak behind the curtain, Sean, of, you advising us here at YFP, this is something we’re looking at you know evolving into the future. So, you know we’re big believers in the Profit First methodology. We’ve talked about that before on the show, great book, great resource. 

There is a recommendation there for X percent of all revenue should go into a tax account. But what we found for us is that wasn’t a perfect number, because of just our personal situation as well as some of the tax benefits of being in the great State of Ohio, you know? 

[0:37:09.8] SR: Right. 

[0:37:43.5] TU: And then, so there’s – that’s one example where things are unique, and then we kind of evolve to our own calculation, which I would say is probably closer to maybe the general rule of thumb that’s out there of, “Hey, take 25%, set it aside” and then we realize, “Hey, that’s got some holes because tax situations are different.” You know, how many kids you have, what’s the total household income, all of these variables, right?

So, I think the projection piece along with what you’re suggesting on the safe harbor is so important, right? As you’re planning for the business because you want to find yourself in that situation where you don’t want a bunch of money sitting in an account that as a growing business, if you didn’t have to make that much in tax payments you could have utilize to grow the business. 

There is an opportunity cost there but we also don’t want to be surprised and put a stress on the cash flow of our business that we go to file in April and we’ve got this big tax bill due. 

[0:38:33.9] SR: Exactly, it’s a push-and-pull kind of thing. 

[0:38:35.6] TU: Yeah. 

[0:38:35.9] SR: So, being able to – at any extent that you’re able to nail that down as close as you can, like you’re saying, it’s better that way, right? You don’t want to loan the government any more money than you have to but you also don’t want to end up owing a ton of money that you may or may not have or on top of that, have any penalties where I think is associated with it too, so yeah. 

[0:38:52.8] TU: Number six on our checklist, Sean, relate to the S-Corp status, I would pursue maybe outside of, “Hey Sean, can I deduct this expense?” maybe the second most common question or pretty close to the top is, “Should I be a S-Corp?” It’s one of those things that people just throw out there of, “Hey, there’s tax benefits of being an S-Corp status.” Tell us more about what that means and when people may be asking or should be asking that question. 

[0:39:14.8] SR: Yeah, and I mean again, the theme of the whole thing is that you’re kind of looking at these things and at least at one point in the year, hopefully around now, but actually more ongoing, but at least at one point in the year saying, “What is my tax classification now and is that what it’s going to be next year or does that make the most sense next year?” So, before I even do S-Corp I’ll give the three like I had mentioned earlier in the call. 

The three most common ones that I would think of small businesses as a sole proprietorship, one person that’s what you see on your schedule, see they call it, and if you – and the biggest thing with this is that for all of these different classifications, LLCs can be any one of these. That’s the thing, if people will say, “Oh, I’m an LLC” any one of these, an LLC is a legal entity distinction versus these are tax classifications. 

You can be an LLC and classify in any one of these, as long as you fit the right requirements. So, that’s one thing to keep in mind. Again, people hear that, they think it means something different or, “Hey, my taxes are going to be different.” It doesn’t necessarily mean the case. So, sole proprietorships are the most common. If you file an LLC for a single person, that’s the default. 

The biggest thing there is that, that is subject to self-employment tax, and then again, that does not have – there’s no withholding. So, you’d want to make sure that you’re keeping track of any estimated payments and stuff. Partnerships is the default for an LLC with two plus people. So, if you and your friend or you and your sibling or something go start a business and you start an LLC, the default for that one is a partnership and that actually is a different tax return and everything. 

So that’s where again, it begins to become a little bit more than just, “Hey, I’m starting this little business.” Your share of ownership income from a partnership is subject to self-employment taxes. So, when you get your K1 at the end of the year from your partnership, that is subject to self-employment tax, which basically is just the employer portion of FICA that you don’t have because you don’t have an employer, it’s you. 

S-Corps is the more kind of exciting piece. So that is, you can have any number of owners but that is where you’re actually incorporating your business and you’re basically – it’s being taxed like a corporation now. And the biggest thing with that is that you don’t have the self-employment tax portion for what you get on your K1. So, if you were in a partnership today and you and your partners each got a K1 and reported that income, there’s self-employment tax on it. 

And then you become an S-Corp tomorrow, effectively that same stuff that’s on that K1, that same income is not subject to self-employment tax. Now, you’re probably thinking to yourself, “Wow, that sounds too good to be true.” It’s not that it is, it’s just that there are catches associated with it and the biggest catch is that when you make that jump to S-Corp, you have to be able to pay yourself as an owner a reasonable W2 salary with the FICA withholdings and everything, AKA, self-employment tax on top of any profit distributions that you’re going to be making, and that right there is the deciding point. 

Well, what people will probably say is, “Okay, well, what’s a reasonable salary and when can I make that?” and there comes my cop-out accountant answer of, “It depends” and it really does depend because you can think about a million different things. “All right, hey, I am starting a small business and I am going to be the CEO and I’m a pharmacist who is going to be providing advisory on pharmacy things.” 

Okay, is your salary a CEO salary? Because I’m sure if I Google CEO salary, the average is probably 10 million dollars or something. Is it pharmacist’s salary? Is that, I mean, are you doing mostly pharmacy-related things? Well, you’re probably will also going to be doing some bookkeeping and administrative stuff too, right? So, is it kind of an admin salary? Figuring out what that is, there really is no science to it. 

It is more of an art than a science. You have to be able to say, “Hey, this is a job that I’m doing, you know, these are comparable salaries of people that are making” and you have to be able to pay yourself, “Hey, this is what I feel and I truly believe isn’t a reasonable wage per my industry per the work that I’m doing and everything”, and you need to be able to do that again before you make that jump to S-Corp. 

And in order, once again, to determine if you can do that, you need to be able to say, “Hey, where am I in the books? Where do I expect my profit to be this year? Do I think I’m going to have a ton of profit on my K1 or I’m going to have a lot of self-employment tax? I don’t want to pay that self-employment tax, so now can I switch to S-Corp?” Well, let’s see. Do I have enough room in my profits from last year to cut myself a salary that the IRS will think is reasonable compared to other entrepreneurs that are doing the same sort of thing? 

I don’t know. I mean, I really would have to look at your finances and we’d have to talk about a lot of things. It’s a very, very long conversation but it’s a very important one because it can save you a lot of money in taxes. But it all kind of comes down to – my questions back to you will be, “What’s your expected profit and loss look? What have you been taking as distributions so far?” 

And if you can’t answer those questions, then we can’t even have this conversation. So it’s a lot of it depends but it all once again comes back to being able to have the numbers to even start to have that conversation to begin with. So, if anybody is still awake, I hope that kind of explains that. 

[0:44:27.8] TU: It’s good. 

[0:44:28.1] SR: I’m sure that put quite a few folks to sleep. 

[0:44:30.6] TU: No, it was good because this comes up so much, right? We’ve talked about this internally a lot of what’s the right amount of paying ourselves and how do we determine that and it’s so subjective, right? And number seven on our list was going to be payroll and paying yourself enough. So, you did a nice job of covering on both of those in one. 

[0:44:45.2] SR: Yep, exactly. 

[0:44:46.0] TU: And you know, just for some insights and how we have handled this, not to say this is advice in any way, shape, or form, and I would reference people. There’s a book called, Simple Numbers, Straight Talk, Big Profits! that is written by Greg Crabtree that I think does a nice job of addressing this issue. 

[0:45:01.6] SR: Yes. 

[0:45:02.1] TU: Not just from a, “Hey, the IRS is going to be concerned” if you’re kind of applying like a stockless salary, but also I think what’s important about this is, are you thinking about your salary in the context of what the business is and potentially is worth? So, what I mean by that is let’s say Tim Baker and I decided that at some point we want to wake up and sell our business. 

Well, if somebody buys it, they may not want to operate it necessarily. Maybe they do but if they don’t, they’re going to be asking themselves, “Hey, what does it cost to replace Tim or what does it cost to replace Tim?” And so if that answer is X and we’re paying ourselves a lot less than that – because then you could argue, are we really giving ourselves a true look at the profitability, the actual profitability of the business? 

And I think paying yourself an equitable salary is not only is the right thing to do by the eyes of the IRS but it also really helps you think about where is the business going and growing. Now, there is a balance there, right? If you don’t have to pay yourself USD 200,000, you can save on taxes and argue you’re paying yourself a reasonable salary, then obviously you want to do that. 

So, good resource and reference I think about with that book I mentioned. Sean, number eight on our list, which is our last item on the small business owner checklist, is seeing about some of the big purchases. We talked about deductible expenses but specifically want to dig a little bit deeper around Section 179 deductible expenses. Tell us more there. 

[0:46:26.1] SR: Yeah, that’s so – that’s really when you think about deductible expenses, the IRS basically says, “Hey, nothing is deductible unless we tell you that it is pretty much.” And when they start to incentivize larger purchases it’s because that’s what they want people to invest in. So, Section 179 is effectively the government’s way of saying, “Hey, typically you have these big things like vehicles and other equipment type purchases that you’d have to pay for upfront now but then only be able to take a little bit into depreciation every year.” 

“That’s not fair to small businesses, we want to encourage folks to put money to the business. So, we’re going to let you if you buy things that fit these bills, take that money on the first year.” Which is awesome to be able to do, especially if you have to make these purchases and it makes sense for your business. But the biggest thing by far that I would say and once again, it rolls back into everything is you really want to make sure like, “Hey, do I have to make these purchases at some point now or in the near future or am I just doing this so I can get a deduction this year?” 

Because yeah, it’s great to get a tax deduction but that’s really only a percentage. It’s not a credit, it’s not a dollar-for-dollar savings, it’s really only a percentage of a savings. So, if it’s something that you have to spend, “Hey, I’m going to have to buy a car next year anyway and I have all this profit this year and I can take that depreciation and offset those profits,” cool, but you need to be able to figure that out and if you don’t have good numbers, you can’t do it. 

[0:47:43.5] TU: Yeah. 

[0:47:43.5] SR: And if you look at your numbers and saying, “Hey, I’m going to break even right now and I don’t need a car,” then you probably shouldn’t be going out there and trying to take advantage of the Section 179 file. 

[0:47:51.0] TU: Yeah, great stuff. We’ve covered a lot, Sean, on this and we’re going to come back to these topics in the future on the show but we want to have this one episode that we could point back to and say, “Hey, small business owner” again, whether you’ve been established and you want to go back and look at some of these things or you’re just getting started wanting to build a strong foundation, we wanted this episode to be that resource. 

So, looking forward to building upon this in the future as well. If folks want to learn more about the tax and accounting services that we offer, that Sean and his team offer at YFP Tax, you can go to yfptax.com. We’ll link to that in the show notes as well. You can book a free discovery call to learn more about those services, we’ll learn more about you to determine whether or not there’s a good fit there. 

For business owners, we offer everything from business tax filing, bookkeeping, all the way up to fractional CFO services, payroll, so depending on where you’re at in the journey, it might be, “Hey, we need all of that” or “We just need a portion of that” and we could grow together over time. So, Sean, thanks so much again for your time. 

[0:48:47.3] SR: Thank you, Tim, have a good one. 

[END OF INTERVIEW]

[0:48:48.9] TU: Before we wrap up today’s show, I want to again thank this week’s sponsor of the Your Financial Pharmacists Podcast, First Horizon. We’re glad to have found a solution for pharmacists that are unable to save 20% for a down payment on a home. A lot of pharmacists on the YFP community have taken advantage of First Horizon’s Pharmacist Home Loan, which requires a 3% down payment for a single-family home or townhome for first-time home buyers, has no PMI on a 30-year fixed rate mortgage. 

To learn more about the requirements for First Horizon’s Pharmacist Home Loan and to get started with the preapproval process, you can visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/home-loan. Again, that’s yourfinancialpharmacist.com/home-loan.

[DISCLAIMER]

[0:49:33.4] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and it is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information on the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts, and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacist unless otherwise noted and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward-looking statements, which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. 

Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 331: How One Couple Paid Off $208k of Student Loans


On this episode, Jackie Boyle, PharmD, MBA and Paul Boyle share their journey paying off $208k of student loans.

Episode Summary

Debt can be an overwhelming weight on one’s shoulders, but imagine paying off an astounding $208,000 of it! This week on the podcast, we are joined by the inspirational duo, Jackie and Paul Boyle. They recount their journey from being neck-deep in student loans to paying them off entirely. This episode delves into their personal and collective strategies, their highs and lows, the financial compromises made, and how they kept the momentum to reach the finish line. From Paul’s decision to be a stay-at-home dad to Jackie’s reflections on missed opportunities with the PSLF program, their experiences provide invaluable insights for anyone navigating their own debt repayment process. We also dive into the emotional and financial challenges they encountered, especially when transitioning to a single-income household. Yet, their story isn’t just about the hurdles; it’s brimming with actionable takeaways and advice for those on similar paths. As Paul and Jackie demonstrate, with determination, strategic financial planning, and mutual support, even the heftiest of student loans can be overcome. So whether you’re struggling with student loans, seeking motivation, or just curious about the Boyles’ debt-free journey, this episode is a must-listen. Join us and discover how you too can rewrite your financial story!

About Today’s Guest

Jackie Boyle is a pharmacy educator by day and coaches pharmacists and pharmacies in a part-time capacity. She received her Doctor of Pharmacy from Northeast Ohio Medical University in 2012, MBA from University of Findlay in 2016, and Master and Bachelor degrees from THE Ohio State University (O-H!) She is highly involved in professional organizations including ASHP and AACP, and also loves spending time with her husband and two daughters, Gianna and Giulia. In her free time, she loves spinning, yoga, and enjoying a warm cup of coffee.

Paul Boyle is a Client Service Associate out of the Cleveland, Ohio area where he has had a diverse career of over 20 years, mostly taking care of customers and clients in various fields of service ranging from manufacturing to professional baseball. He received a Bachelor’s degree in Sport Management from The University of Akron in 2020, while taking time away from the workforce to raise his children. Paul spends most of his free time with his wife, Jackie, and two daughters, Gianna and Giulia. An avid Cleveland sports fan, musician and aspiring podcaster. When not supporting his local teams he likes to enjoy the occasional motorcycle ride, which is another longtime passion.

Key Points From the Episode

  • Get to know Jackie and Paul, and their student loan debt repayment journey.
  • The shared decision for Paul to be a stay-at-home dad and finish his degree.
  • A reminder that you can make mistakes and still achieve your debt repayment goals.
  • The extensive student loan debt that Paul inherited when he married Jackie.
  • Having a baby and becoming a single-income household.
  • How the emotional weight of student loans shifted throughout their debt journey.
  • Why Paul always maintained confidence in their plan and abilities.
  • Jackie’s income-based debt repayment strategy during her residency.
  • Her biggest regret: not using the PSLF program.
  • The challenge of staying motivated during an aggressive repayment journey.
  • How Jackie and Paul maintained momentum.
  • The value of budgeting and breaking repayment down into smaller goals.
  • Why everyone’s debt repayment journey is different.
  • Finding the right balance between debt repayment and investing in the future.
  • How to assess your priorities and allocate your finances.
  • Using your side hustle to pay for additional expenses.
  • Refinancing your student loans and taking advantage of lower interest rates.
  • Advice for new graduates as interest on student loans returns after the pandemic freeze.
  • What’s next for Jackie and Paul now that they have their student loans behind them.

Episode Highlights

“We ended up paying off earlier than I anticipated due to some choices we’ve made. So, yes, it’s very exciting to be on this journey. That said, I know we definitely made mistakes as well.” — Jackie Boyle [0:05:27]

“I never thought inheriting this much debt comes with the territory of a relationship. So that was all brand new.” — Paul Boyle [0:07:57]

“I was so engulfed in residency life that, honestly, [repaying my debt] took a back burner. I should have been doing things way differently during that time.” — Jackie Boyle [0:09:30]

“If you look at that big number, you could be paralyzed by it. But if you look at those smaller numbers, it’s like, ‘okay, over the course of the next three months, I can achieve this goal, and I know how I’m going to achieve it.’” — Jackie Boyle [0:12:49]

“We never felt strapped or that we had to eat ramen for the next couple [of] years to achieve this. That made things better, and that’s motivating in its own [right]. You could see, ‘Hey, we’re doing great.’ We could keep this up as we’re going.” — Paul Boyle [0:15:52]

“Educate yourself. Find a mentor or a financial planner to work with. Get a budget in line. Those basic tools can be really helpful in giving you the motivation to realize that you can do this with a better understanding of your own personal situation and what’s possible.” — Jackie Boyle [0:26:26]

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[00:00:00] TU: Hey, everybody. Tim Ulbrich here, and thank you for listening to the YFP Podcast, where each week we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. 

This week, I welcome Jackie and Paul Boyle as they share their journey of paying off $208,000 of student loans. We discussed the motivations behind their debt-free journey, how they balanced debt repayment with other financial goals, including investing and buying a home, lessons they learned along the way, strategies they employed to get on the same page, and advice that they have for those that are navigating loan repayment. 

Okay, let’s hear a brief message from YFP team member, Justin Woods, and then we’ll hit play on Jackie and Paul Boyle’s debt-free story. 

[00:00:40] JW: Hey, Your Financial Pharmacist community. This is Justin Woods here, Director of Business Development at YFP. You may be one of the 13,000 pharmacists that have already signed up for YFP Money Matters, which is our weekly newsletter. But if you’re not, what are you waiting for? I want to invite you to subscribe. We send financial tips, recommendations, the latest podcast episode and money resources, all specifically for pharmacists. It all comes straight to your inbox every Friday morning. So visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/newsletter, or click the link in the show notes to subscribe today. Again, that’s yourfinancialpharmacist.com/newsletter. See you there. 

[INTERVIEW]

[00:01:25] TU: Jackie and Paul, welcome to the show. 

[00:01:27] JB: Hello. 

[00:01:28] PB: Hey, Tim. 

[00:01:29] TU: Well, this is a real treat for me. Many of your listeners may not know. Paul, you are a member of the YFP team, and so we’ve had the opportunity to work with one another here over the last several months. We’re incredibly grateful to have you as a part of the team. 

Jackie, you and I have known each other. It’s got to be well over a decade, I think, at this point. I used to be on faculty at NEOMED way back when, and you started there as a student and then a resident. Then we were colleagues. You’re continuing to do great work there, and we’ll talk more about that here in a moment. 

So this is a treat to be able to have both of you on as friends, as well as to share with our community your debt-free story. So congratulations to both of you and excited to dig into a little bit of what went behind that, how much debt you paid off, what were the motivations, what worked, what didn’t work, and what lies ahead for you guys now that you’ve got this big milestone achieved. 

Paul, let’s start with you. Tell us a little bit more about your background, your career, and the work that you’re doing now. 

[00:02:26] PB: Yes. So like you mentioned, I am part of the YFP team now as a client service associate. Love my job. Love the people I work with. It’s great to be a part of this community. But before that, my last paid job was with a company called Lincoln Electric, and I was a warranty service rep there in my last position. So still kind of helping customers out in that realm. But I chose to – well, we as a family made a decision when we had our first daughter that we wanted one of us to stay at home. 

So me being the lesser income earner and with this topic, it’s student debt, we decided that my wife was going to continue to work and that I was going to be a stay-at-home dad. I used that time to go back to school, finish my degree in sports management and, yes, never looked back. Since then enjoyed the time with my kids. Being a stay-at-home dad was probably the best job that I’ve ever had so. 

[00:03:23] TU: That’s awesome. Jackie, I just scratched the surface on my mention of your training at NEOMED and your residency and your faculty role. But tell us more about your pharmacy journey. What led you into the profession, including the work that you’re doing now?

[00:03:36] JB: Oh, thank you, Tim. This is such an exciting thing to be on your podcast, Tim. My relationship has gone on for so many years and so many different capacities. So I’m just so excited to be talking with you here today. My background is a bit of a mix of ambulatory care practice and education. So I started out my career in practice-based faculty roles and a few different settings in ambulatory care and then actually took a full-time position at the college at Northeast Ohio Medical University here in 2019. So I’ve been here for the past four years. 

Around 2017, though, I started getting a little bit of an entrepreneurial itch. Of course, as Tim is one of my greatest mentors, I started talking with him about ideas for part-time work and actually got connected to an awesome entrepreneur, Alex Barker, who was starting a career coaching company at the time and have been career and business coaching pharmacists now for about six years, which plays into our story as well. It’s just been a ton of fun. 

So, yes, a little bit of a few different things. I love being a jack of all trades and kind of exploring what’s out there in pharmacy. So, yes, this journey has been a long one, but I hope that we could share some of our mistakes, some of our wins, maybe inspire a few people along the way. 

[00:04:59] TU: So, Jackie, let’s start with the juicy details around the student loans. How much did you end up paying off between the two of you when it was all said and done? 

[00:05:09] JB: Yes. I think it was about $208,000. As the CFO of our family, I was keenly keeping an eye on our balances as they went down over time. It’s awesome to think back now how much we started with and where we ended up. We ended up paying off earlier than I anticipated due to some choices we’ve made. So, yes, it’s very exciting to be on this journey. That said, I know we definitely made mistakes as well, and I wish – for example, like PSLF. I probably could have taken advantage of that, but I didn’t even know that was a thing. So I’m here to say that you can make mistakes and still achieve the goal eventually as well. 

[00:05:53] TU: Yes. That’s such a good reminder, Jackie. I think there’s so much pressure around this decision. We have the opportunity to talk with pharmacy students, new grads on a regular basis. We talk about the importance of really understanding these loan repayment options and getting that decision that’s best for your personal situation. I think that can feel weighty at times, right? Because it can have big implications, whether it’s a PSLF strategy or another strategy. 

But, also, what you shared, I think, is such an important reminder is that mistakes are inevitable part of the financial plan. It’s going to happen. They happen on the regular and giving ourselves some grace and learning from those mistakes. We’re not always going to get it according to the textbook, and that’s okay, right? That’s part of this journey is to learn as well. 

Paul, I want to start with you but really a question for both of you. As you think about your journey and the student loans, did your feelings around the student loans change over time? Some people we talk with, when I say give me the 0 to 10 student loan pain scale, where zero is the – no. They are what they are. They’re going to take care of themselves. Ten is the house is on fire, right? No right or wrong answer, but everyone is different on that journey. I’m just curious. Like for you, did that change at all along your journey, right? As you guys grew in terms of a family and your careers, tell us more about the emotions and feelings around the student loan debt. 

[00:07:21] PB: Yes, absolutely. It’s intimidating for me at the beginning because when Jackie and I met, she had just graduated. So she went into residency. As everybody knows out there, residency pay is not quite the same as full pharmacist pay. But I was working full-time at the time, too. But just realizing like the massive amount of that compared to mine, I think what Jackie – I don’t know how much mine was at the time. I only had a couple thousand left to pay off on mine, and we paid it off first. 

But kind of we got engaged, and I was like okay. I never thought like inheriting this much debt like comes with the territory of a relationship. So that was all kind of brand new. 

[00:08:04] JB: I came with a lot of baggage. 

[00:08:06] PB: Yes. It’s not bad baggage, but it’s just something that you never thought you had to plan for, right? So before even like our wedding and taking on a mortgage and stuff like that, here’s this amount of debt that amounts to a house. I think I took it pretty seriously, but I don’t think I felt like it was a pain point quite yet because, again, we were both working full-time. We figured, okay, we could come up with a plan to handle this. 

But as it progressed and as I left work and we became a single-income household, it kind of went up there to like a seven or an eight maybe, just because of that weight like of all that debt, and like will we get there, and then we started a family and added expenses and stuff. So I wouldn’t say I lost sleep over it because I had kind of confidence in especially Jackie as our CFO and her earning potential that we could kind of navigate it. 

[00:09:03] JB: Yes. I think, for me, I was in denial for the first two years. So during residency, I did income-based repayment, which meant that my monthly payments were zero. But the interest was accumulating rapidly, as you all know. So those first two years, I should have been at a seven or eight. But I was at like a zero to one because I’m like, “Oh, this is not – it’s not a problem right now. I don’t need to be paying attention to it.” I was so engulfed in residency life that, honestly, it took a back burner. I should have been doing things way differently during that time. 

Like Paul said, during like the year of our engagement and then leading up to marriage and our first child, that’s when it became more of like a house on fire seven or eight-plus for me. I was so determined to start attacking this thing. Once I realized that I should have been doing things way differently, and I had already made a few big mistakes with not going to the PSLF program. So, yes, definitely changed for me over time and perhaps that denial factor didn’t help us for the first two years. 

[00:10:07] PB: It was kind of out of sight, out of mind type of thing. We had, like I said, paid off mine, and we’re like, “Oh, hey. That’s a great feeling.” So we kind of did in our minds know, hey, with us, with the DINK lifestyle, right? Like we can kind of tackle some of these other debts that we had, and I knew Jackie wasn’t a fan of debt to begin with. So we had a couple small wins there. But still, like I wasn’t thinking about the big one quite yet. 

[00:10:37] TU: Jackie, remind me. Year of residency completed was what?

[00:10:42] JB: So two years and it was done in 2014. 

[00:10:45] TU: 2014. Okay. So when we think about that journey, 2014, obviously, you mentioned the income-based repayment. Paul, you mentioned your loan. But 2014 to 2023, that’s a period of time where you’re waiting through this. You’ve got a young family. Other expenses are creeping up. Many of our listeners can relate to this feeling. Momentum can be very hard to sustain for a long period of time, right? We had a pharmacist on recently that paid off a little over $345,000 of debt in five years. Very, very aggressive repayment journey. I asked her the same question I’m going to ask you, which is when you think about paying off over $200,000 of debt over a sustained period of time, it’s hard to keep the motivation and the momentum going. 

For you, Jackie, let’s start with you. For the two of you, for your family, like how were you able to keep that momentum and motivation going? What was the why that was fueling you guys as you were trying to really make sure you persisted through this over that period of time?

[00:11:47] JB: Well, before starting to dive into financial topics, our one session about this topic, student loans, was the last day of our P4 year. We had an hour-and-a-half session about what our debt was, our repayment options. Again, it was just so overwhelming at that time that it got shoved back away. Once we got oriented towards like what our life goals were and that we wanted to not only gain financial freedom but set up our kids for success, be able to do things like giving, pay off things as quickly as possible, then I think breaking it down into smaller goals was the only way that it felt achievable. 

I actually started writing down small goals every morning in the increments of like $5,000 to say, okay, if I can get the loan balance under this, like I’ve achieved another goal. As achievement-oriented person, like that felt really good to do. It might sound silly, but it also made the overall goal feel manageable because if you look at that big number, you could be paralyzed by it. But if you look at those smaller numbers, it’s like, okay, over the course of the next three months, I can achieve this goal, and I know how I’m going to achieve it. 

I think the other helpful thing we started doing once we got married was to start budgeting and just to even have a handle around what are our finances, what our expenses, how much money do we have left over at the end of the month that’s not left with a purpose, and starting to really allocate like, okay, where are all of our dollars going. Where does this extra money contribute to the financial plan or not? 

Thankfully, with all the resources that your team has developed, Tim, and all the education you were providing, we were able to start learning about different options, different ideas, how we can start tackling it. 

[00:13:37] TU: A couple things I heard there which are really good. You mentioned, obviously, the budget being an important part for the two of you. I suggest if you are like most couples, right? Budgeting is a process that takes time to make sure that you’re in alignment with the bigger vision and the goals. But such an important part of, hey, this is the shared vision that we have for our financial plan. I think that was really key. 

The other thing you mentioned which I thought is really important is breaking it down into smaller goals, right? So $208,000, that’s big. It’s scary. It’s overwhelming. We talk about the same thing when it comes to saving for retirement 20, 30, 40 years in the future. If you punch numbers in the calculator that show you’re going to have to save two, three, four, five million dollars, whoa, like what do I need to do? What does that actually mean today, right? 

So that $5,000 milestone, these goals that are along the way can really help with making it not only realistic but also providing some of the momentum along the way of, hey, we accomplish that. Let’s take a moment to pause, stop, celebrate. Maybe there’s even something that’s planned in there. Maybe there’s not. But just to realize that, yes, this is going to take some time. But we are making progress towards this journey. 

Paul, what about for you? Anything else here to add as it relates to the motivation and the momentum?

[00:14:51] PB: Yes. Everything that Jackie said was great. The small wins. I was not the one who was looking at the number quite a lot because she is the bill payer for us. So I would check in every once in a while and be like, “Where are we at,” and kind of provide emotional support throughout that part of the journey because I never wanted her to feel like – and, again, as the person who kind of inherited this debt with her, like, well, it’s not her fault or anything like that. That I want to feel like it was hers. It was ours together. Yes. But seeing those numbers kind of go down. 

It was nice throughout the whole process, at least for me, to realize, okay, we have a budget. It’s not a very serious budget. We’re not always letting that hang over our heads like, “Oh, we’re out somewhere doing this. Is this in the budget or not?” We never really had that pop up for us. So throughout this whole time, reaching many milestones, while also kind of living the life that we wanted to at that time, we never felt strapped or that we had to eat ramen for the next couple years to achieve this. That made things better, and that’s motivating in its own. Well, you could see, hey, we’re doing great. We could kind of keep this up as we’re going, right? 

[00:16:07] TU: Yes. I’m really glad you mention that, Paul, because I think that’s a good segue into everyone’s journey is different, right? So there’s a spectrum of how you can tackle these loans. You could be very aggressive. It could even be more aggressive, right? Someone could pay off $208,000 of debt in three, four, five years. Maybe in that case they say, “Hey, debt is the only thing I’m focused on. I’m not buying a home. I’m not investing. I’m not saving. I’m not doing other things.” We could debate like what are the pros, what are the cons of that approach. 

There’s the other end of the spectrum. You can take federal loans out 25 years, right? It could be a longer period of time. For some people, that is the pathway they choose, whether it’s a forgiveness pathway or not, so that their monthly payment is as low as possible, and they’re able to allocate dollars towards other parts of the financial plan. It sounds like for the two of you, it was somewhat in the middle, right? It was a fairly short timeline. That’s a large chunk of money in a 9, 10-year period. 

But, Paul, to your point, it sounds like, hey, there was also still the life that you were living, and there was some sacrifice, obviously. Otherwise, you wouldn’t have gotten to this point in time. But you were able to do some other things that you wanted to do, whether that be buy a home, whether that be investing, saving for the future, going on vacation, investing in experiences as a family. If I heard you right, Paul, it really felt like you were able to do both of those at once. Is that fair?

[00:17:30] PB: Yes, absolutely. I think it never reached the point at any moment for me like where we would have to make any kind of major lifestyle change or change up what we were doing throughout the whole process. 

[00:17:42] TU: Jackie, and this is one of the most common questions I get from new grads is should I pay off the debt or should I invest in the future. Then you add on top of that a home purchase is often a common thing, very challenging right now with what’s happening with home prices and interest rates. I think there’s this or mentality. Should I do this? Or should I do that? Or should I do this? Typically, as is the case in your journey, it’s more of an and often. So tell us about your feelings surrounding the aggressiveness or the length of time for the debt repayment. 

[00:18:15] JB: Yes. I think to your point, Tim, like the and and trying to make some financial compromises could help you set up your situation to be what you want it to be. So for example, like we got approved for a home loan of like $445,000 when we were looking at houses. Paul and I were like, “Wow, that’s a lot of money.” Then looking at homes at that time in 2014, the market was a bit different for houses. The houses that were at that value, we’re like, “We don’t need a home that’s $445,000. We can look for homes maybe around half that level and still get a really nice place to live and grow our family and everything.” 

So we ended up finding our house. Our purchase price was 225. So that alone was huge savings, compromising with we wanted discretionary funds to be able to go out and do things. Just we love like going out to eat, and hanging out with friends and family, and spending a little bit of money on things for vacation. That’s really important for us to have experiences with our family as well. So I think it’s talking with your partner. Or if you don’t have a partner, like thinking for yourself and your priorities in your life and where you want to allocate your finances. 

I think, for me, because I was so interested in like still getting this paid off quickly on a single income for most of the time, honestly, was to think of other outside-of-the-box ways to be able to make those extra payments happen. So picking up that side hustle of coaching, which, honestly, doesn’t feel like a job to me. It’s really fun. But all of the extra income we earn from that went towards typically our student loans. 

There are things we could have done differently with that as well with contract work and taxes and tax planning. There’s still so much that I have to learn that, thankfully, again, the YFP team is going to be helping us with. But thinking of how can you increase that income dollar for yourself and your family to work more aggressively if you want to or if you’re motivated by that as well. 

[00:20:32] TU: Yes I’m. glad you mentioned the extra income, right? We see that often where people are going through a debt repayment journey, and it will be a side hustle, extra shifts, extra income maybe for a long period of time, maybe for a short period of time. But that can really be a boost to, wow, we feel like we’re making some more progress, and maybe this is now a 9 or 8 or 7-year instead of a 10, 11, 12-year. Sometimes, the extra 100 or 200 bucks or 300 bucks, whatever the dollar amount is, may not seem significant. But we tend to forget the momentum that that can provide behaviorally, as well as a part of the plan. 

I just love what you guys shared about for you, for the two of you, for your family, you decided on that this was best, right? This approach of, hey, we’re going to pay off the debt. It’s pretty big payments. But we’re also going to find this balance of living our life. There’s no right or wrong answer here, and I think it’s so easy to fall into the trap of, hey, what’s the right way to do this. 

There’s a mathematical quote right answer, but we don’t live our lives according to just mathematically correct answers, right? So we’ve got to run the math, true. But we also have to think about what does it mean to live a rich life, and how do we find the balance between these two things? That’s true not only for debt repayment, but that’s true for all parts of the financial plan. 

[00:21:46] PB: If I could add to that, for me, kind of the extra money, the side hustle type of thing, we’ve always kind of thought of our income kind of separating those things. So before I left work, in my job, we had a bonus structure that we had a pretty hefty bonus that came at the end of the year. So what I found a lot of people running into trouble is that they relied on that bonus to pay for their regular everyday every year budget. For me, you take that mentality. Okay, here’s my salary. That’s my salary for the year. Let’s pretend that the bonus doesn’t exist, right?

The same thing with side hustle money, then when that becomes extra like, okay, that’s all of our goal money, right? It’s stuff to – like we paid for our wedding from my bonus. So any of those extra things that we know they’re going to cost a little bit extra more, that’s where kind of that side hustle, the extra income goes straight to that stuff. 

[00:22:41] JB: One other thing I wanted to mention here was that we refinanced our loan twice throughout the journey. So that savings on interest rate declined, which I know that interest rates are not great right now. But when we refinanced, well, I basically just kept checking every two years or so to see, okay, are there better interest rates available. Can we decrease that if possible? Because over time, that interest just adds up. Oh, there’s nothing that could make you more fired up than extra interest on your student loan. That was something that was also a great change to the process. 

[00:23:19] PB: Yes. Her last refinance. Sorry, Tim. Her last refinance was a big motivator, at least for me, because when she said, “Hey, look how much we knocked off,” and we looked at like the saving that we got through there, and I’m like, “Holy cow.” It was a significant amount. We’ve always kind of –

[00:23:35] JB: I think it was $33,000. 

[00:23:37] PB: Yes. It was crazy. So that was a big, big win, again, extra motivation to say, “Hey, we’re on the way. We’re going to do this.” Yes. Because I’m a big fan of paying off higher interest stuff first and kind of – she hates debt no matter what, so I always try to have that conversation like, “Well, if it’s a low, like we got 0.9 on our car right now. It’s like, hey, being ultra-aggressive may not be the best way, but we like to kick it out. But, yes, I mean, seeing lower interest rates is huge. 

[00:24:08] TU: Yes. Hopefully, we see those interest rates come back down. Right now, it’s – especially for those that only have federal loans, that’s probably the best place to be for most people, just because of some of the benefits that come with federal loans. But I’m guessing your first refinance was way before the pandemic. Is that correct?

[00:24:24] JB: Oh, yes. Yes.

[00:24:25] TU: Okay. So you already kind of had pulled yourself out of that where you weren’t negatively impacted in any significant way through the freeze because that decision was already made. Then at that point, it was really about, hey, how can we get the best interest rate that we can. It sounds like that led to some significant savings. 

At the time of this recording, we’re at the time period where student loan interest is turning back on. Payments are going to start back up after three and a half years, right? Dating back to March of 2020. I do really feel for the graduates [inaudible 00:24:59] classes that really haven’t yet had to make student loan payments, and this is going to be a somewhat of an abrupt transition. I’m hearing a lot of things like, “Tim, I’m overwhelmed. I’m confused. I’m frustrated. I’m anxious.” Not just about the student loans but also because of things we’ve already talked about. “I want to buy a home. I’ve got other goals I want to achieve. The six-figure income just isn’t really going to go as far as I thought it had.”

I’m just curious to hear from both of you. Jackie, let’s start with you. As you look back on your own journey and things that you’ve either said, “Hey, we did this really well, or maybe these are some things that we’ve done differently,” what advice would you have for these new graduates coming out?

[00:25:40] JB: Oh, so many things. I wish I would have done differently. Just get your budget in line first. I think knowing where you are spending and where you can cut back on expenses and even getting a wrap around that is really helpful and can maybe dismantle some of the doubts that you have about the fact that you can do this, I think. No, I didn’t get – I have no in incentive to say this. But like working with a financial planner like the team at YFP and like the resources that you all have, just even on your website, to check out. 

I remember looking at the student loan calculator and the change in interest rate and just playing around with the tools that are on there on your website. Just educate yourself. Find a mentor or a financial planner to work with. Get a budget in line. Those basic tools can be really helpful in giving you the motivation to realize that you can do this with a better understanding of your own personal situation and what’s possible. 

[00:26:43] TU: Paul, how about for you?

[00:26:45] PB: Yes. I would add, for anybody who graduated kind of during the pause, you haven’t had to experience like any of your payments kicking in yet. Having a – just budgeted in there, whether you’re paying it or not, right? Kind of figure out what method is best for you. Obviously, tons of research and I have an inside look at this stuff now as far as all the repayment plans. I mean, we’re kind of on fire with it right now. There are so many different ways. 

I love seeing how we can save people money because, again, we talk about our experience with, hey, we probably could have done student loan forgiveness. Find every option that’s available to you. Then don’t let it cripple you. Like I said, we lived a comfortable life on a single income; starting new family, buying a new house, getting married, getting married through residency. Just the busyness through that part of your life, there’s ways to do it. Yes. I just – stay motivated. Don’t be intimidated by that big number is kind of the best advice that I could give. 

[00:27:48] TU: Yes. I think it goes back to full circle. When you were talking earlier about the budget and breaking it down to smaller goals, making this number mean something today is such an important part and until you work the budget to know what capacity is or isn’t there and how this big rock is going to influence everything else you’re doing. We tend to live in that mental state of frustration. I’m confused. I’m overwhelmed. 

I often say, hey, when we put it all on paper, and, Paul, you’ve seen some of the behind the scenes of this, and you look at all the analyses, and we nerd out in the spreadsheet, we may not like the numbers. Nor will they change from this month to the next month. But the peace of mind that comes from knowing we’ve looked at these numbers, knowing what our options are, and knowing what the monthly payment will be. All right. Now, we can work on a plan, right? That is so important to understand. Otherwise, it’s a hope. It’s a wish. It’s a dream. It’s a guess, and that leads to frustration, right? We’re talking here about student loans, but that’s true with all parts of the financial plan. 

Let me ask you guys this. This is a huge milestone, a huge milestone. But it is one of many milestones that you’re going to accomplish on your financial journey. I think that for the pharmacists that are listening that are earlier in their career that are feeling some of the stress and the weight of their own student loans, they’re like, “Man, I just can’t wait until I get to that finish line, right?” That finish line where Jackie and Paul are. It’s a great accomplishment, but it’s not the finish line. You guys are just getting warmed up. 

So my question here is what’s next for you. Now that we’ve got the student loans behind us, when you fast forward and say, “Hey, five years from now, September 2028, like what does success look like for the Boyle family? Now that we’ve moved this big rock out of the way, we can start looking towards other parts of the plan.” Paul, let’s start with you. 

[00:29:34] PB: Yes. I’d say getting our retirement on track, that’s kind of top of mind. We still have our mortgage as far as debt, and we still have one car payment. But we’re going to knock out our car here pretty soon, and that’s going to be another win that gives us like, “Hey, we only have a mortgage.” That we don’t necessarily – you don’t need to pay that off as quick as you would think so. Just with that freedom, it’s like, “Holy cow, what are we going to do with this extra income?” I’m working again. That’s extra income. 

So, yes, I think saving for retirement, making sure that that is lined up and then maybe some home projects. I don’t know. Maybe I get something recreational or fun for me as a short-term goal if Jackie lets me. But we really don’t splurge on a lot of things and we haven’t for the past 10 years. So maybe it’s discussing do we have any kind of bigger fun things that we want to do within the next five years, and then look at the time beyond that, and make sure that us and our children kind of are set up for a comfortable life, our vision of what a comfortable life is. 

[00:30:42] JB: Oh, yes. I think to add, figuring out – I have so many questions about like investing in 529s or educational funds. We don’t really know what to do with that piece yet. We know we want to set up our kids for success for the future and whatever that looks like for them. I’ve always had dreams of like having a vacation home and somewhere we can go or rent out or like collaborate with friends or family on to have a place to make memories. 

Then I think the last piece is like giving back and determining where we can contribute to our community and just pay it forward in that direction as well. So, yes, we’re really excited. We just started working with the planning team at YFP. Yes. It’s been so enlightening so far. We’ve only had one meeting and I’ve just – I’m like in awe of how much we’ve learned in one short hour. So I’m sure it’s just the beginning of an awesome journey and lots of great things on the horizon. 

[00:31:41] TU: Well, this has been fantastic. Again, congratulations to the two of you. I am super excited to follow your journey and see where things are going. As I mentioned, I think you’re just getting warmed up. This is a huge, huge accomplishment, one that is certainly worth celebrating but lots of exciting times to come ahead. So, Jackie, Paul, thank you so much for taking time to join the podcast. I appreciate it. 

[00:32:01] JB: Thank you. 

[00:32:02] PB: Thank you so much, Tim. 

[END OF INTERVIEW]

[00:32:04] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts, and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacist, unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward-looking statements that are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. 

Thank you, again, for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week. 

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 330: How One Physician Had $550k+ of Loans Forgiven via PSLF


On this episode, sponsored by FirstHorizon, Brenna Roth, MD, MPH, shares her journey of having over $550k of student loans forgiven tax-free via Public Service Loan Forgiveness (PSLF).

Episode Summary

Are student loan forgiveness programs a beacon of hope for graduates drowning in debt? Joining us this week is Brenna Roth, MD, MPH; a physician who achieved an incredible financial milestone – over $550,000 of student loans wiped clean through the Public Service Loan Forgiveness (PSLF) program. In our conversation, Brenna discusses her background in medicine, the accumulation of her student loan debt, her initial feelings about the debt, and her journey to tax-free forgiveness. She also shares advice for individuals facing high student loan debt and considering PSLF as an option. We also unpack the challenges of dealing with loan servicing companies, the impact of the COVID-19 payment freeze, and the benefits of lower monthly payments through income-driven repayment plans for those pursuing PSLF. If you’re curious about the PSLF program or facing significant student loan debt, Brenna’s inspiring story sheds light on the potential benefits of pursuing loan forgiveness and highlights the changing landscape of student loan repayment.

About Today’s Guest

Brenna Roth, MD, MPH is an infectious disease doctor and public health specialist who works in academic global health and research. She lived and worked in Tanzania for 3 years and has continued to work on international programs and research projects across sub-Saharan Africa since. She has successfully navigated the Public Service Loan Forgiveness Program across multiple loan servicers, jobs, and continents.

Key Points From the Episode

  • Background about Brenna and her medical career journey.
  • Discover how Brenna accumulated a large amount of debt.
  • She shares her approach to tackling the student loan debt mountain.
  • Her hesitancy toward PSLF and what ultimately changed her mind.
  • Common pitfalls and mistakes people make regarding repayments.
  • Challenges with loan servicing companies and documentation.
  • Recent changes that have improved the PSLF program.
  • The pros and cons of the PSLF repayment plan.
  • Ways COVID-19 impacted student loan payments and the freeze on payments.
  • Brenna’s experience making minimal payments during her time abroad.
  • Benefits of lowering adjusted gross income through retirement contributions. 
  • How PSLF allowed Brenna to shift her focus towards long-term financial goals.
  • Advice for recent pharmacy and medical school graduates considering PSLF.

Episode Highlights

“Those high-interest rates building up over the years really impacted the amount [debt].” — Brenna Roth [0:04:53]

“My hesitancy was not knowing for sure, if after all of those years, [my debt] would actually be forgiven.” — Brenna Roth [0:10:51]

“It makes sense to, if you’re going to do PSLF, to pay during residency, fellowship, those kinds of years when you’re not making very much money.” — Brenna Roth [0:20:34]

“I think I would say, definitely give PSLF some serious consideration. I won’t say it’s the right thing for everybody. Obviously, it can depend on how much debt you have and what kind of job you are going into.” — Brenna Roth [0:25:04]

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[0:00:00] TU: Hey, everybody. Tim Ulbrich here, and thank you for listening to the YFP Podcast, for each week we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. This week, I welcome Brenna Roth, a physician onto the show, to talk about her public service loan forgiveness (PSLF) journey, where she recently had more than $550,000 of loans forgiven, tax free.

Yes, you heard that right. More than $550,000 of student loans forgiven, tax-free. We talked about how she accumulated that large debt load, her feelings toward the debt, what went as planned, and didn’t go as planned along the way, and advice that she has for those that are facing high student loan debt.

Let’s hear from today’s sponsor, First Horizon, and then we’ll jump into my interview with Brenna Roth.

[SPONSOR MESSAGE]

[0:00:45] TU: Does saving 20% for a down payment on a home feels like an uphill battle? It’s no secret that pharmacists have a lot of competing financial priorities, including high student loan debt, meaning that saving 20% for a down payment on a home may take years. We’ve been on a hunt for a solution for pharmacists that are ready to purchase a home loan with a lower down payment and are happy to have found that option with First Horizon.

First Horizon offers a professional home loan option, aka doctor or pharmacist home loan that requires a 3% down payment for a single-family home or townhome, for first-time homebuyers, has no PMI and offers a 30-year fixed rate mortgage on home loans up to $726,200. The pharmacist home loan is available in all states except Alaska and Hawaii and can be used to purchase condos as well. However, rates may be higher and a condo review has to be completed.

To check out the requirements for First Horizon’s pharmacist home loan, and to start the pre-approval process, visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/home-loan. Again, that’s yourfinancialpharmacist.com/home-loan.

[INTERVIEW]

[0:01:58] TU: Brenna, welcome to the show.

[0:02:00] BR: Hi, thank you. 

[0:02:02] TU: Well, it’s been a while since we’ve shared some PSLF stories on the podcast. In fact, over a year and a half ago on episode 248, we featured three pharmacists that collectively had more than $700,000 in student loans forgiven. We’ll link to that episode in the show notes. But all that to say, it’s been a while, and I’m certainly excited for this conversation, which came to be after YFP Planning, Financial Planner, Kim Bolton, shared the good news with our team, about your MOHELA account officially showing a $0 balance with over $550,000 that was forgiven, tax-free. And as soon as I heard that, I thought, we have to share this story with our community.

Brenna, as I mentioned to you before we hit record, there still is a lot of skepticism, a lot of questions, a lot of unknowns, surrounding public service, loan forgiveness. I think the more stories that we can share, the more information that we can get out the better. So, before we dig into your specific journey, tell us a little bit about your background, including your journey into medicine, where you went to school, and the work that you’ve been doing since?

[0:03:07] BR: Yes. So, I’m a trained infectious disease doctor. I did my undergraduate work at Tulane University. I also got a Master’s of Public Health there. Then, I worked for a couple of years in public health work research, and then I went on to medical school at Ross University. I did my residency at York Hospital in Pennsylvania, and I did my infectious disease fellowship at the University of Maryland, and I’ve been working since then.

[0:03:40] TU: A lot of years of training. Certainly, our audience can appreciate that. You know, $550,000 of debt that’s forgiven, tax-free, that’s a big number, and I think even quite shocking to our community who’s used to high debt loads, but not that high, right? Maybe $150,000, $200,000 or $250,000. But over $550,000, again, that is a large amount. I assume, and one of my questions about your brand as we get started is how did that debt load come to be as big as it was? Is that a function of medical school, as well as the master’s degree? Tell us a little bit more about the accumulation phase of that amount of debt.

[0:04:19] BR: Yes. It’s from the loans that I took out for my Master’s of Public Health as well as medical school. I was paying off the Master’s of Public Health, initially, when I left school. But then when I started in medical school, that repayment was paused. But during that time, still, the loans were collecting interest. So, it was really that accumulation over all those years of the loans plus — and I’m sure people are familiar with, they have rather high-interest rates, and I was no exception. So yes, just those high-interest rates building up over the years really impacted the amount.

[0:04:58] TU: Yes. The accumulation of interest, on a couple $100,000 or more of debt adds up pretty quickly, especially over periods of time with training involved. I think that while most people know that, we have, somewhat Brenna forgotten that, just because of the last three years, we’ve been on this freeze. So, I think for those of us that graduated, many of my loans are at a fixed 6.8% interest on the federal side, and you quickly realize, like, whoa, and you’ve got a couple $100,000 of debt. If you’re not making payments that are covering that interest, that loan balance grows pretty quickly, and all of a sudden, 200 becomes 250, becomes 300. 

Now, if we’re pursuing public service loan forgiveness, and we get to the finish line of tax-free forgiveness, that’s not a bad thing. The goal is that we pay as minimum out of pocket as we can, to have as much as we possibly can, forgiven, and tax-free. But obviously, for those that go through the journey of paying those out of pocket, not through our forgiveness plan, certainly that can be a concern.

Brenna, I’m curious about your feelings surrounding the debt. No right or wrong answer. But I often talk with pharmacists. I joke it’s the student loan debt pain scale, 0 to 10. I talked with some pharmacists that may have a couple $100,000 of debt, and they describe it as a 10. The house is on fire, it’s causing anxiety, they’re frustrated, they’re worried. Even something like a PSLF strategy, they want these gone tomorrow. Even though the math shows it’s going to be favorable, it’s causing that much stress.

Other end of the spectrum, I’ll talk with pharmacists to say, I’m closer to a one or two or three. I recognize it’s a big deal, but they kind of are what they are. If it’s a longer payoff or forgiveness strategy, they may be more comfortable with that, to be able to maximize whatever they can dollars-wise. So, for you and your journey, what were your feelings surrounding the debt load, and did that change at all, as you were going through this PSLF journey?

[0:06:48] BR: It definitely changed over time. I mean, I would say it was at a tenant point. But honestly, I got to a point where, at one point, before I sorted into PSLF, I really just thought I will just have these debts forever, and it’s just going to be a part of my life and better to just accept it, and know that it’s just going to be there. So, I would say it went from a 10 to maybe more like 5 or 6, because I won’t say that I wasn’t at all concerned. But it kind of diminished. But with PSLF, I think it – well, initially, I won’t say it decreased, because I was a little skeptical about whether it was the best choice and I also, over time, I switched the companies that were handling my loans. That never proved to be a really great transition.

So, that was always stressful, because I was always worried that documentation or information would be lost, and the efforts I’d been putting in would not show up at the end, like something would go wrong. So, there were moments where stress kind of went up about all of it. But I would say overall, maybe it was only the last probably few years that I kind of – it dropped below a five for me when I started to have more confidence that things were really moving and things were really going to actually be forgiven.

[0:08:29] TU: Yes. I’m glad you brought that up with the loan servicing companies, right? That’s something we hear often, which is, those can be headaches to navigate. I mean, even right now with the new safe plan that’s coming out, people’s payments are being calculated incorrectly. For good reasons, people are freaking out, wanting to get the right information. Might have to recertify income. Should I recertify an income right now? I mean, there’s just so many nuances and wrinkles. I think as you go through some of the pain of those, and you get over those speed bumps, you tend to get a little bit more comfortable knowing how to navigate it.

But unfortunately, the difficulties with the loan servicing companies, that hasn’t gotten a whole lot better. I think people have gotten more comfortable with PSLF, because of hearing stories like yours, or we’re getting more education and information to make sure that they’re crossing the T’s and dotting the I’s correctly. But we would be lying if we said it’s going to be a clean journey for everyone, right? Just 10 years, 120 payments, you wake up, it’s tax-free. That’s the goal. But it doesn’t mean there’s not going to be some bumps along the way as well.

[0:09:34] BR: Definitely.

[0:09:35] TU: You mentioned reluctancy. I want to talk more about that. Is that something we hear a lot? I often will present on student loans, and when I show the calculations, I think, people nerd out and they get really excited about, “Oh, I can optimize this, and maybe it allows me to achieve other financial goals because I’m not having to put as much towards my student loans.” But there still is very much a sense and feeling of, what if? What if the rules change? What if this isn’t everything that I think it’s going to be? So, I want you to talk a little bit more about your reluctance, what were some of those questions, and then what ultimately changed, that allowed you to say, “Okay, yes, this is the path that I’m going to pursue.”

[0:10:17] BR: So, it should be noted that I was first presented really seriously, shortly after signing up with them with Tim, with YFP. Because this was, my loans were probably my major financial concern at the time. This was 2016, 2017, and I’d heard about the program. But I hadn’t really heard of anybody successfully navigating it, for sure. So, I think it was just not really knowing – my hesitancy was not knowing for sure, if after all of those years, things would actually be forgiven. Of course, as you mentioned, the strategy really is to lower your payments as much as possible and to get through those 10 years, meeting the requirements. But taking as little financial hit as possible.

Which the alternative to that would be, okay, let’s focus on making paying off as much as we can each month, and getting this paid down as quickly as possible. So, you’re accumulating as little interest. Those are like the two options that were presented to me. While it was clear that PSLF made the most sense, on paper, my reluctance came from not being totally sure that at the end of that 10 years, and that would be 10 years wasted in accumulating interest. All of these things, and that was really where my hesitancy came from. Again, this was a number of years ago, when there wasn’t as much evidence that the program was really going to definitively work. I even – I didn’t know if – I even had the concern of what if they just up and decide to cancel it for some reason?

So, it was really that. And you did hear horror stories of people thinking that they were doing everything right for years, and then getting nine years in, and being told, “Oh, no, you were in the wrong repayment plan”, or whatever it may be. During one of my switches from – actually, no. I was checking in with my loan servicer, and just to see is everything on track, is everything look okay. I felt pretty comfortable because you guys were helping me. So, I felt like I’s were dotted, T’s were crossed, but I was still checking in, and they actually told me, “Oh, we don’t go back and check that stuff until it’s like the last year of repayment.” And suddenly, I realized, “Oh, that’s why people get to the end, and they don’t know, because nobody’s really reaching out and communicating with them that this isn’t correct, or this should be.” So, people were getting really far along before getting any feedback that anything was not correct.

[0:13:12] TU: Yes. And when you mentioned the skepticism for good reason, that was around 2017. Is that correct?

[0:13:17] BR: Yes, 2016 or ’17, somewhat in there.

[0:13:21] TU: Yes. Which totally makes sense, right? This program was legislatively enacted in 2007,10-year timeline to forgiveness. That first group to be forgiven would have been in 2017, 2018. This is where a lot of the initial negative press came out. To be fair, the Department of Ed could have done a lot better job in terms of, communicating this and preventing some of these problems that people were identifying it to your point, at the end, when they’re getting near the finish line. Even in the six, or seven years since then, the information has gotten a lot better, the education has gotten a lot better. I think the loan servicers are more comfortable. Still not necessarily easy to always work with, more comfortable. The path, even with employers, now there’s a, through the studentaid.gov profile, you can punch in the EIN of your employer and see if there are qualifying employers. Even those questions in the past were like, “Am I 100% sure that I’m working for a qualified employer?”

For a good reason, you had skepticism, and when you’re talking about the horror stories, I’ve mentioned to you before we hit record that there was an article published by NPR. I think it was 2018, 2019 that the headline was “99% of PSLF applicants are denied.” Somewhat of a misleading story. We haven’t actually looked into the details in terms of the number of people who didn’t fully complete their application and the paperwork. But there were fair issues, and those issues being, “Oh, I didn’t realize that I had to maybe first consolidate my loan into a direct loan, to be able to then unlock a qualifying repayment plan so that then it counted as a qualifying payment.” It’s even crazy when I present on this topic, Brenna, like, I even catch myself like, well, if you do this, and then you do this, and then you do this, then it counts as a green checkmark, right? Then we’re good.

It’s kind of crazy that we have to jump through all these hoops. But that’s just the system that we’re in and the cards that we’ve been dealt. Now, thankfully, you were positively impacted by some of the changes that the Biden administration implemented where for individuals that maybe didn’t have all those T’s or I’s crossed because they didn’t necessarily know from Jump Street that they were going on a PSLF pathway, that there was a reconciliation process for those payments to count as qualifying payments, which you benefited from, is that correct? 

[0:15:33] BR: Yes, because when I consolidated and got everything in order, and that was actually another thing. I didn’t realize, because you mentioned employment and the employer’s account. I really did not think that my residency training would count, and it was actually, again, Tim, who pointed out that he really thought it would. So, that was another thing that pushed me once I realized that that period of time also counted, that that shifted, I think, my willingness to go into PSLF.

But yes, I did benefit because I did have a – some of my loans were in the correct repayment plan, but I had some that were not. So, there was a gap of, I don’t know, maybe four or five years between some of the loans just because once I got those into the correct repayment plan, you know, it started from zero. So, it didn’t matter that I’ve been paying those loans for years, none of those previous payments had counted, because they weren’t in the correct repayment plan.

But luckily, with that Biden, that like one year, going back and counting, a lot of those payments that hadn’t previously counted towards the forgiveness were counted, which was great.

[0:16:48] TU: Yes. I think it was really helpful, especially for people Brenna, like you, that maybe necessarily didn’t start with a PSLF journey in mind. We are seeing more people now that they come out, they go into residency, they know, “Okay, I’m not going to defer, so I can count those as qualifying payments” and they’re thinking about PSLF as a strategy right away. But that hasn’t always been the case. Again, just based on the age of the program and the information that we have available.

One of the things that is beneficial about the strategy, as you’ve mentioned, as I’ve mentioned, is to try to pay as little out of pocket so that we can have as much forgiven tax-free. You mentioned before we hit record that you were able to have about five years, about half of the 10-year timeline of payments, actually, where you weren’t having to make payments at all. Tell us more about what was happening, where you were able to have such a large chunk of time where you didn’t have to make those payments.

[0:17:40] BR: Yes. So, everybody has been affected by the pause in payments with COVID. So, I was also affected by that. But I moved to Tanzania, actually in 2017. I was living there, full time. Because of that, it affected my taxes, and basically what it looked like, what my income looked like, and thus my repayment. So, if I remember correctly, there were a couple of years there where technically I could have been paying zero. I was still paying a small amount on my loans. But yes, I had a couple of years there, where just because of living internationally and working internationally. My income appeared low enough that – because it’s income-based, and so basically, my payment was functionally zero.

[0:18:33] TU: Yes. You had a few years of the pandemic freeze, as did other borrowers, were those counted as qualifying payments. That was one of the big questions when that freeze started, and that was good news that people that were pursuing PSLF, those counted as qualifying payments to the freeze that just ended here in September of 2023. Then, you have a couple years in Tanzania, you mentioned, perhaps this could have been zeroed out payments. You’re making small payments.

I’m glad you mentioned that because one of the most common questions that I get is should I defer my loans during residency, or in your case, residency and fellowship. While not blanket advice, generally, my answer is you don’t want to defer, and the reason you don’t want to defer is that typically because you’re earning such a low income while you’re in residency or fellowship relative to what you will earn, and how they do the calculations on these, often these will be very low, and sometimes $0 monthly payments. But as long as you’re inactive repayment, those count towards qualifying payments of the 120.

So, I still think there’s a lot of advice out there from maybe my generation of pharmacists or those even older. I graduated in 2008, where it was kind of blanket advice. Like differing residency, differing residency, and often the case may be actually not to defer, so you can get those accounts as qualifying payments. 

[0:19:54] BR: Yes. It’s funny that you mentioned that, because you just triggered – that was – I think that’s actually, because I still had that had a feeling of what if something goes wrong with a PSLF. So even though I was being told those couple of years, “You don’t have to make a payment, it’s zero, it will still count.” I made the decision to make a small payment because I didn’t want anybody to be able to come back later and say, “Oh, you weren’t paying during these times.” So, I still had my own little, is this really going to work the way it’s supposed to work even at that point? But definitely, it makes sense to, if you’re going to do PSLF, to pay during residency, fellowship, those kinds of years when you’re not making very much money. 

[0:20:44] TU: Yes, and one of the other, we won’t spend much time on this now. We’ll talk about it in another episode. But one of the advantages of the new save plan that was announced by the Biden administration here in the last couple of months, and certainly, it’s not the right fit for everyone. But especially those that are new graduates, new trainees in residency, there’s a provision as a part of that safe plan where as long as you’re making the minimum payment, whatever that is, based on your income, that your loan balance can’t grow, which is really nice. Because if you’re in deferment, like interest can still accumulate, you’re not making any payment technically. So, especially for those that are in one or two or more years of residency that can be, that can be really valuable.

Brenna, what did PSLF allow you to do in terms of other goals. Typically, if we’re optimizing the strategy, we’re hopefully paying less out of pocket than we normally would have with other strategies. And therefore, that gives us options to invest and save, or pursue other financial goals, where we don’t have to just solely focus on our student loans. So, for your situation, for your financial plan, what did PSLF allow you to do in terms of other goals?

[0:21:51] BR: I really, for the most part, focus a little bit more on investment retirement, and because really, I hadn’t been too focused on that until I was finishing a fellowship, going into an actual job, and I’m feeling like I had that money. So, I think that allowed me to focus a little bit. Because as I said, I sort of always thought that these loans would just be part of my life. So, it shifted my long-term thinking, and as we discussed before, having the loans forgiven didn’t really change my day to day. But even during that process, I think, instead of being so focused on I’m going to have to repay this at some point, I could really focus on that longer term, where do I want to invest my money.

I mean, yes, it did allow, because I think I would have been far more reluctant to maybe take this trip or that trip, for fear of what that meant longer term. So, it probably did allow me to feel a little more free to do those kinds of things. But for me, it was really more about the longer-term goals and being able to focus more on investments and retirement plans and those kinds of things.

[0:23:16] TU: That’s one of the things I love about this strategy is when we’re optimizing this, one of the goals we’re trying to achieve is to lower our adjusted gross income, the best that we can, which is the factor they’re using in the payment calculation to determine what your monthly payment is. One of the ways we can do that, kind of the low-hanging fruit, is making sure we’re maxing out traditional retirement accounts like a 401(k), a 403(b), and maxing out HSAs. So, there’s this beautiful double effect of not only are we then saving more through those vehicles, which are going to be able to grow and compound and time value of money, make sure we start that as early as we possibly can. But it’s also at the same time, lowering our monthly student loan payment, and that’s really cool. When we can see that working, and we all know our listeners know well, that when you’re saving even just a little bit more early in your career, and that money has a long time period to grow, that’s going to have a significant impact and effect. 

Brenna, I’m curious, we have a group of graduates coming out right now that many may be listening to the show. We have three graduating classes now that haven’t had to make any payments on student loans, because of the freeze. Interest just started back up in September. Payments are resuming here next month in October. I think it’s fair to say, there’s a decent amount of anxiety. Maybe people that were making payments that didn’t have to, and now they’re having to make payments again. Or for new graduates, or just on the front end of this journey, and not really sure what is ahead, but certainly there’s some anxiety surrounding that. As you look backwards now, finish line has been crossed. You’ve had a large amount of debt forgiven, tax-free. What advice would you have, whether it’s pharmacy graduates, or medical school graduates, that are just getting started and they’re looking ahead and saying, “This feels big. This feels scary.”

[0:25:03] BR: I think I would say, definitely give PSLF some serious consideration. I won’t say it’s the right thing for everybody. Obviously, it can depend on how much debt you have, and what kind of job are you going into. How much are you going to be making? I’m in infectious diseases in medicine. That’s not a subspecialty that is known to make a lot of money compared to some others. So, for others – and I don’t know as much about pharmacists, and their training, and different specialties within that. But I would assume there’s some variation as well.

So, I think it is a very individual decision. And for me, though, as I said, having a financial planner, being able to discuss it, really just my income to debt ratio, PSLF was just very clearly the best option for me. So, I think, just really give it some serious consideration, and don’t talk yourself out of it immediately. It is working. Just my experience over many years, and with many different – having my loans switched from different companies, I can tell you, it’s been so much easier recently to be able to track things, to get information about things. It’s gotten so much easier over the years. I mean, it does work. There are more and more people with loans being forgiven. So, I hope that the concern and the fears are diminishing over time. I won’t say everybody needs to go out and do it. But I think it should be definitely a serious consideration as an option.

[0:26:52] TU: Yes. I’m glad you said that. We estimate in pharmacy, and I know it’s higher in medicine, just based on the distribution of practice, and where people are at nonprofit to for profit. But we estimate that about 25% to 30% of all pharmacy graduates are eligible or qualify for PSLF.

Now, they may not have the right debt-to-income ratio. It may not make sense. They may be unsure about how long they’re going to be in the nonprofit space, and there’s other questions. But to your point, Brenna, I think the take-home point I hear there is making sure that you’re considering it among all of the options, and running the numbers, how do we feel about it? What does this mean for other parts of the financial plan? And making sure that we feel that we’re making an informed decision, looking at all the different options that we have on the table. For some, that’s PSLF. For some, that could be a non-PSLF strategy over a long period of time, if they’re working for a for-profit. Or we have some individuals that say, “Hey, I really want to aggressively pay these off.” And they have reasons and a rationale that may make sense for them.

So, this is certainly an area where, whether we like it or not, student loan repayment is a somewhat complicated topic, and it’s something that we’ve really got to dig into and make sure that we’ve got good information as we look at and evaluate all the options that are available.

Well, Brenna, this has been awesome. I really appreciate you taking the time coming on the show to share your journey of having over $550,000 of debt that was forgiven, tax-free. As I mentioned at the beginning, we’re going to share some other resources in the show notes of where we’ve talked about public service, loan forgiveness, as well. And to the Department of Ed’s credit, as you gave them credit here, I think recently, of information getting better in the loan servicing companies. They have updated a lot of information and resources, and especially with so much changing right now, make sure to check that out at studentaid.gov.

Again, Brenna, thank you so much for taking time to come on the show.

[0:28:38] BR: Thank you.

[0:28:40] TU: Before we wrap up today’s show, I want to again, thank this week’s sponsor of Your Financial Pharmacist podcast, First Horizon. We’re glad to have found a solution for pharmacists that are unable to save 20% for a down payment on a home. A lot of pharmacists in the YFP community have taken advantage of First Horizon’s pharmacist home loan, which requires a 3% down payment for a single-family home or townhome for first-time homebuyers, and has no PMI on a 30-year fixed-rate mortgage.

To learn more about the requirements for First Horizon’s pharmacist home loan, and to get started with the pre-approval process, you can visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/home-loan. Again, that’s yourfinancialpharmacist.com/home-loan.

[OUTRO]

[0:29:24] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and it is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog post, and podcast is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analysis expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacist unless otherwise noted and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward-looking statements, which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. 

Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 329: Medicare Selection & Optimization: Common Mistakes, Tips & Tricks


On this week’s podcast, sponsored by APhA, Certified Insurance Counselor, Insurance Agent, and Medicare Specialist, Josh Workman, joins the show to cover Medicare 101 and considerations for selecting your Medicare coverage plan.

Episode Summary

Many people (including pharmacists!) aren’t fully informed about Medicare, the options they need to consider, and the pros and cons of each option. That’s why, in this week’s episode of the podcast, we brought on Certified Insurance Counselor, Insurance Agent, and Medicare Specialist, Josh Workman to give us a Medicare 101! Tuning in, you’ll hear about Josh’s role in the world of helping seniors navigate Medicare benefits, options for coverage, and the five main differences between Medicare Advantage and Supplement plans. Finally, he shares some words of wisdom for pharmacists struggling to answer Medicare questions for themselves, family members, and even clients.

About Today’s Guest

Located in the Akron Ohio area Josh Workman has been an insurance agent since 2010 with Medicare planning being his main area of focus. He started his career with Nationwide, but then moved to an Independent agency in 2014. Aside from helping individuals who are new to Medicare, he also works with professionals such as care facility coordinators, doctors and pharmacists as they assist their patients with Medicare plan decisions. Medicare can be extremely confusing so instead of the salesman angle, Josh takes an educational approach when helping his clients with Medicare Supplements, Part D Plans and Medicare Advantage Plans. One of his favorite parts of the job is teaching Medicare 101 classes to people who are new to Medicare.

Key Points From the Episode

  • What Josh does in the Medicare world. 
  • The basics of Medicare and the timelines for selecting coverage. 
  • Two main options for coverage when going onto Medicare. 
  • Five differences between Advantage Coverage and Supplement Coverage. 
  • A quick summary of the two plans and the pros and cons of each. 
  • The kinds of plans Josh sees people choosing and why. 
  • Some of the dangers of being influenced by marketing when choosing a Medicare plan. 
  • Mistakes that Josh sees people making when buying a plan. 
  • Advice for leveraging the help of a Medicare agent for pharmacists.

Episode Highlights

A lot of people make an assumption that original Medicare – Part A and Part B, includes prescription drug coverage. It actually does not. The only way you can get Part D is through an insurance company.” — Josh Workman [0:10:46]

If you have to pay medical bills, if you have a network, you’re probably going to be paying less for your insurance because you’re subjecting yourselves to these medical bills and to this network.” — Josh Workman [0:15:21]

“Medicare Advantage is less expensive. There’s a network and there’s medical bills. Supplement is more expensive, but it doesn’t have a network and it doesn’t have medical bills.” — Josh Workman [0:20:20]

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[0:00:00] TU: Hey, everybody. Tim Ulbrich here, and thank you for listening to the YFP Podcast, for each week we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. This week, I welcome to the show Josh Workman, a Certified Insurance Counselor, Insurance Agent, and Medicare Specialist. 

Aside from helping individuals who are new to Medicare, he also works with professionals such as care facility coordinators, doctors, and pharmacists as they assist their patients with Medicare plan decisions. We tap into his Medicare experience to discuss five key considerations for evaluating Medicare benefit options. You’ll find this episode insightful and helpful, whether you are evaluating benefits for yourself or helping patients or other family members navigate this process. 

All right, let’s hear from today’s sponsor of the American Pharmacists Association and then we’ll jump in my interview with Josh Workman. 

[SPONSOR MESSAGE]

[0:00:50] TU: Today’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacists Podcast is brought to you by the American Pharmacists Association. APHA has partnered with Your Financial Pharmacists to deliver personalized financial education benefits for APHA members. Throughout the year APHA will be hosting a number of exclusive webinars covering topics like student loan, debt payoff strategies, home buying, investing, insurance needs, and much more. Join APHA now to gain premier access to these educational resources and to receive discounts on YFP products and services. You can join APHA at a 25% discount by visiting pharmacists.com/join and using the coupon code YFP. Again, that’s pharmacists.com/join and using the coupon code YFP. 

[INTERVIEW]

[0:01:37] TU: Josh, welcome to the show. 

[0:01:38] JW: Thanks for having me, Tim. 

[0:01:40] TU: Well, this is a treat. You and I have known each other for a long time when Jess and I lived up in Northeast Ohio. Our families got to know each other well. I’ve always appreciated the work that you’ve done on the Medicare side. It’s taken us over 300 episodes, but I’m excited to finally bring this together to be able to tap into your Medicare experiences and knowledge. Thank you so much for coming on. 

[0:02:03] JW: Yeah. Thanks again for having me, Tim. 

[0:02:05] TU: Josh, as we were planning for this episode, and here we are in the month of October, we’re talking about all different aspects related to the health insurance part of the financial plan and we realize that Medicare really isn’t a topic that we’ve talked really much about, maybe not even at all, but it’s such an important part of the financial plan for those that are making that transition into retirement. 

As we were planning for this episode, we were thinking about a few different groups that may find value in this, right? Of course, there’s individuals listening that are getting ready to make that Medicare decision for themselves and making sure that they’re optimizing that benefit selection. But perhaps, even a bigger group would be, “Hey, I’ve got aging parents that are going through this phase.” Or, “I work at a pharmacy and often I have patients that come looking for help in terms of Medicare selection and what are some of the things that I should be thinking about.” I know, Josh, in your work as well, you consult with individuals that are going through selection, but also work with other providers and facilities as well. Is that correct? 

[0:03:05] JW: Yeah. Yeah, that’s correct. I’m working with individuals or maybe in a group setting, like a seminar setting is a lot of what I do. But then, yeah, working with pharmacists, working with doctors, working with assisted living facilities, all those types of professionals have questions and I’m able to help their patients as well. 

[0:03:25] TU: Let’s start with some of the basics of Medicare, Josh. Pharmacists get really a slim amount of this in pharmacy’s glamour. We talked about health insurance at large. We talked about the different parts of Medicare. It’s been 15 years for me, perhaps more for others that are listening as well. Let’s start with some of the basics, Medicare 101, Parts A through D. Just break down for us what those different parts cover. 

[0:03:49] JW: Yeah, sure. There’s two parts to what’s referred to as original Medicare. That’s Part A, like Adam. Part B, like boy. A would be hospital benefits. You’d use your Part A coverage, for example, if you were in the hospital staying overnight for a surgery. Let’s say, Part B, like boy, that’s going to be medical benefits. Think of that as more outpatient-related things, specifically, like just going to the doctor, seeing a specialist, an outpatient surgery, those kinds of things. But then there’s a couple other parts as well, Medicare Part D, like David, or I like to think of it as D for drugs. That’s the easy way to remember that one. That’s going to be the prescription drug coverage. Part C is another way of saying Medicare Advantage. We’ll get into this, I believe in a little bit, but that would be Part C, which combines A, B, and D benefits into one plan. 

[0:04:47] TU: Awesome. Timeline for coverage. This is something that I remember learning about this and just having the takeaway of like, this is important. You don’t want to mess up in terms of when you’re selecting coverage, making sure you’re not missing a deadline. What is the timeline for selecting coverage? 

[0:05:03] JW: Yup. There’s going to be three main election periods if you want to think of them that way. Three times when you will be signing up for your plan, making decisions on your plan. I will say, there’s a lot of narrative out there that makes this a little scarier than it needs to be. It’s not that intimidating, but the first one is what’s called your initial election period. This is when folks are turning 65, they’re new to Medicare. 

Another thing when someone could be using their initial election period is if they’re been on social security disability for 24 months, or if they develop end-stage renal disease or ALS, that’s another time prior to age 65, they can go on Medicare. Let’s use the turning 65, example because that’s the most common. It’s a seven-month window. It starts three months prior to your birth month, runs the month of your birth, and then three months after. A seven-month window when you can sign up. Most folks will use the three months prior and then start their benefits, the month of their birth. That’s the most common. 

[0:06:12] TU: That is a pretty – I didn’t actually realize it was that long in terms of the seven months or the three months prior, the month of your birth date, and then the three months after. Then the other piece I’m thinking about here would be the transition or change, right? I had initial coverage I selected here. We’re using the example of 65, but I’m looking at other options in the future in terms of renewals. How does that work timeline-wise? 

[0:06:33] JW: Yeah. Great question. That would be what’s referred to as the annual election period or annual enrollment. 

[0:06:39] TU: Okay. 

[0:06:40] JW: That is a window of opportunity towards the end of the year, getting into it now. October 15th through December 7th of the specific dates. That’s for folks who, yeah, let’s say, for example, they’re 67, they’ve been on Medicare for a couple of years now, but they want to reevaluate and see if the plan that they’re on now is going to be the best one for the coming year. They can evaluate that during the weeks, again, of October 15th through December 7th. Then their change, if they do make a plan change, it would start taking effect on January 1st of the following year. 

[0:07:17] TU: Okay. Those are the two main ones I’ve heard you mention so far. So, that initial election and then the annual enrollment process. Anything else important to remember around the timeline for selecting coverage? 

[0:07:30] JW: Yeah. There could be a third election period. Just think of them as special election periods. We do run into these. I do run into them every now and then, but if someone moves, for example. Moves out of state maybe or it could even be a move to a different county within the same state, they would qualify for a special election period to make a change. If someone gains or loses Medicaid eligibility, we recently saw a lot of that with the COVID benefits that were extended for folks on Medicaid. 

They basically, couldn’t lose their Medicaid eligibility, but that stopped. I believe it was in April of this year. That qualifies for a special election period to make a change or if there’s other things too, like you have a parent who moves into an institution for lack of a better word, where they’re moving into a long-term care facility or a nursing home. That would also qualify as a special election period to make a change outside of annual enrollment. October 15th through December 7th. 

[0:08:31] TU: Awesome. With that background information, let’s spend most of our time here talking about evaluating benefit options, what to look for, what to consider. Before we get into five main areas that you’ve seen, five big differences based on your experiences. I think it’s important that we differentiate at least at a high-level Medicare advantage and Medicare supplement plans because when we talk about some of these areas here in just a moment, we’re going to be referring to both of those and the different sides to consider between them. Define those further, for us. 

[0:09:00] JW: Yeah. So generally speaking, you have two main options for coverage when you go on to Medicare. I should say this is what most folks do. Most folks will either go with a Medicare Advantage plan or a Medicare supplement. Medicare advantages is much more heavily advertised. Sometimes folks think that’s the only option they have, but they technically don’t. Supplements are an option as well, but there’s going to be five major differences between those two plans that can really impact how you receive your care, what you’re going to pay out of pocket when you use your insurance, how you get your drug coverage, if it includes perks like dental, vision, hearing, all those kinds of things. 

Yeah. There are some pretty major differences between those. That’s what I spend most of my time with my clients who are new to Medicare, so they can make an informed decision on what’s best for them. 

[0:09:53] TU: Yeah. I remember Josh, you shared with me as we were preparing for this episode. The worksheet that you have of the two sides of the street, right? Choosing a plan. Advantage versus supplement and going through these, which I really like, because I think this can become very overwhelming, either as an individual choosing coverage, helping a family member, helping a patient, especially when so often, as you mentioned, especially on the advantage plan side, there’s just a lot of advertising, right? That’s behind this. 

The mailings, the commercials, etc. so really being able to take a step back and say, “What are the options and how can we objectively compare these. What do we need? What do we not need to make an informed decision?” I think is so important, not only financially, but also just have the peace of mind and being able to navigate some of the nuances involved here. Let’s start with those five big differences. Number one, Josh, is Part D in terms of how one receives Part D insurance coverage. Tell us more there. 

[0:10:44] JW: Yeah. It’s important to know a lot of people sometimes make an assumption that original Medicare, what we talked about before, Part A and Part B, that includes prescription drug coverage. It actually does not. The only way you can get Part D is through an insurance company. Now, how it would work on either side of the street. Yes, the way I like to describe it. If you go with a Medicare Advantage plan, most of the time, those are going to include prescription drug coverage at no additional cost. If you go with the Medicare Supplement plan, however, it does not include prescription drug coverage or Part D, you have to buy that separately. Advantage is included. Supplement, it’s not included. You have to pick it up separately. 

[0:11:27] TU: Number two, it relates to the network here. We’re thinking of options for providers, access to hospitals, something that folks are familiar with from other experiences with health insurance, but what are some of the factors to consider here as relates to network coverage and the two sides of the street? 

[0:11:43] JW: Medicare Advantage plans are going to have a network. Meaning there’s a list of specific doctors, hospital systems, specialists that you need to stay within in order to have coverage or to pay the least amount possible. Medicare supplements, one of the big benefits of them is they do not have a network of any kind. You can literally go to any provider in the country, in the whole United States, that takes original Medicare and they have to accept your supplement. It doesn’t matter what insurance company you have. You could be in the Northeast Ohio area like we are and have an insurance company that’s local here and receive care in California and they’ve never heard of your local company, but they have to take it, because it’s a Medicare supplement. 

[0:12:32] TU: That network piece, obviously, very important to folks. The third area, which I’m sure is the one we’re often focused on is the cost side of it, the medical bills or the cost-sharing, ultimately what we have to pay out of pocket when using insurance. What are some of the key differences here between the advantage and the supplement? 

[0:12:50] JW: With a Medicare Advantage Plan, you will have medical bills along the way as you use your insurance, or just you could say if you use your insurance. By medical bills, I’m referring to deductibles, co-pays, and co-insurance. You may have a deductible. Honestly, most plans I offer, Tim, don’t have a deductible, folks have to reach, but they could. 

A co-pay, you know how that works, most likely you pay $25 to your primary care, 40 to a specialist, those kinds of things. Then co-insurance is a percentage, right? You may have to pay 20% for durable medical equipment or 20% for chemo and radiation. The nice thing about Advantage Plans is that they do put a limit on what your medical bills can be. Most folks have this with your current insurance, even if you’re not on Medicare, called an annual maximum out-of-pocket expense. 

All of your medical bills for the year can’t exceed your plan’s annual maximum. But know that, again, you will have them along the way, medical bills, that is. Whereas Medicare supplements, they don’t really have any medical bills that you’re going to have to worry about. Okay. Really, the biggest medical bill for the most popular supplement that I write out of my office is the Part B, like boy, deductible. Currently here for 2023. It’s $226, so you pay that for any Part B service. Once that’s paid though, Tim, the medical bills are done for the rest of the year. 

[0:14:26] TU: Wow. 

[0:14:26] JW: So that $226 deductible is your medical bill and it’s also your annual maximum. If you want to think about it that way. 

[0:14:34] TU: Okay. So, very naive on this topic, Josh, but you’re just describing the differences and obviously when you talk about the Supplement plan and the lower amount, what I seem to hear is not insignificant, but a much lower amount on the deductible, less potential out of pocket versus when you reference the Advantage plans more out of pocket. What we tend to think of from our experiences right now for many of us with the insurance. So, is it fair to say that cost-wise monthly premiums, you typically see a vast difference between these two, because of that or is that – it depends? 

[0:15:11] JW: No, you’re right. There’s a difference in cost. So, that would be the fourth big difference here between these two. As I’m sure listeners are putting together, if you have to pay medical bills, if you have a network. Well, you’re probably going to be paying less then for your insurance, because you’re subjecting yourselves to these medical bills into this network. 

Medicare Advantage is going to be your less expensive route to take. It could even be, and folks may have seen this advertised. You could even see that these Medicare Advantage plans are zero dollars per month. Okay. Those are actually some of the most popular advantage plans. 

[0:15:46] TU: Interesting. 

[0:15:48] JW: Some of my clients will choose is the zero-dollar premium plan. Okay. Now with supplements, though, these are going to have a monthly cost. There aren’t any zero-dollar Medicare supplements. This currently, I mean, it all really depends on the area that you live in. I just work here in the state of Ohio, but here in Ohio, a good rule of thumb for a turning 65 mail for a Medicare supplement, depending on the plan letter that’s chosen is probably going to be somewhere between $130 to $150 a month for a Medicare supplement. Female would be a little bit lower. Again, that’s a pretty rough estimate, Tim, just depending on the service area that you’re in. 

[0:16:37] TU: Yeah. It’s really helpful, though, Josh. I’m thinking about how this integrates back with the financial plan. It’s taking me back to episode 275. Tim and I talked about how to build a retirement paycheck, right? We’ve been accumulating funds. Hopefully, for the majority of our careers. Now we have to be able to replace what was coming from our income through the different retirement vehicles that we’ve built, right? 401Ks, IRAs, maybe we have some HSA funds that can come into play here, as well. 

This is important, right? Because if you’re in the plans that you were just referencing on the supplement side, where let’s say you’ve got a monthly premium of $150 a month, and then you know what the deductible is going to be, like we can start to build those numbers into the monthly paycheck that we’re going to be receiving during retirement, essentially paying ourselves or if we’re on an advantage plan, and let’s just say there’s an advantage plan with the example you gave where there’s a zero-dollar premium, but we know what the out of pocket match your limit is, like, okay, we need planning for that, right, or planning for some of the other expected expenses from cost sharing of the healthcare. 

You can really start to see how and understanding of the options and the plans and what the impact could be annually, as well as monthly when you talk about something like a monthly premium, could build into the financial plan, build into building that retirement paycheck as we make that transition into that phase. 

[0:17:56] JW: Yeah, exactly. 

[0:17:58] TU: All right. Number five, Josh. This is one that I didn’t think about that was really interesting when you were talking about this in our preparation for the show. With some of the variances between the plans, when it comes to things like dental, vision, hearing, or the extras, tell us more here. 

[0:18:14] JW: When it comes to dental, vision and hearing, this is becoming a much bigger issue, I would say than it used to be. I’ve been doing this for several years now, and back when I started, folks weren’t that concerned about dental, vision, hearing. However, advertisements on TV, the mail that folks are getting that are turning 65 heavily focuses on this side of things. Medicare Advantage plans are going to include dental vision and hearing benefits, as well as other things too, like over-the-counter items, allowances that the plans give people several dollars a month that they are a quarter rather than they can use to buy Tylenol or Advil or Band-Aids and Toothpaste, that kind of stuff. 

Advantage plans are going to include those kinds of things. Again, it’s usually at no additional cost. Even a zero-dollar plan would include these things. Whereas Medicare supplements do not include any of these kinds of things, but you can buy them separately, just like you buy the Part D, separately. You can pick up dental vision hearing benefits at an additional cost if you’d like them. 

[0:19:17] TU: Josh, before we wrap up by talking about some of the common mistakes that you’re seeing, folks making when it comes to evaluating benefit options and selecting a policy. Summarize here for us the five points that we just talked about as, again, individuals may either be choosing their own policy, working with a family member or working with patients that they can take away this information. 

[0:19:36] JW: Yeah. The easy way that I like to describe it is this. If you go with a Medicare Advantage plan, this is going to be your less expensive route to take. It’s going to include Medicare Part D. It’s going to include dental vision hearing. However, you are going to have a network and you are going to have medical bills along the way as you use it. Medicare supplements are your more expensive route to take. They don’t include drug coverage. They don’t include dental, vision, hearing, although you can buy them separately if you’d like. However, you don’t have the medical bills and you don’t have the network to be concerned with. 

If you’re a pharmacist out there and you’re trying to quickly explain this to a patient, maybe just go about it that way. Medicare Advantage is less expensive. There’s a network and there’s medical bills. Supplement is more expensive, but it doesn’t have a network and it doesn’t have medical bills. 

[0:20:29] TU: Great summary, Josh. I’m curious, like rough numbers. What do you see as like a distribution between these two buckets as you work with those going into Medicare enrollment? 

[0:20:39] JW: Yeah. That is a great question. That’s one that’s become very common as my clients are sitting down trying to make a decision on what they want to go with. I’m finding now, Tim, and it didn’t used to be this way, that it is about a 60-40 split. About 60% are going the Advantage plan side and about 40% are going the supplement side. When I first started, it was probably 70-30 the other way or heavily weighted on the supplement. 

I think one of the big reasons for this is the marketing. Advantage plans are much more heavily marketed to people who are new to Medicare. I said before, a lot of people think that they are the only option. Not that they’re a bad option, but again, folks are just having much more education, getting much more education about Advantage plans than they are supplements. 

[0:21:32] TU: Let’s talk about that marketing because I think that’s one of maybe a little bit too harsh to call it a mistake, but I think the influence of the marketing can be real. I’ve seen many of these commercials, Josh. I think I know the ones you’re referring to and just the impact that whether it’s mail marketing, TV, radio, a combination of can have and sway in someone in one direction or another. Tell us more about that. Even some of the other common mistakes you may see folks making when they’re going through the selection process. 

[0:22:03] JW: Yeah. Those commercials are becoming very popular. We’re talking about like the Joe name, this commercials guys that you can’t help but see, especially getting here into the fall into annual enrollment. Those commercials, the mistakes I see people making is buying a plan based off of what they’re seeing just on those commercials alone. If you actually pay attention to one of them, they are referencing primarily the perks of the plans. 

The dental, vision, hearing benefits, they may even say things like call and check your zip code, because you could get a plan where you don’t have to pay for your Medicare premium and at all. The plan will pay for it for you. In my opinion, those aren’t the only things you should factor in when you’re buying health insurance. You should factor in other things too, like does your doctor take the plan? That’s a pretty big one. 

Yeah, you might have a nice dental benefit, but when you need to go to your primary care physician and they say, “No, we don’t take this.” How valuable is that dental benefit now? Other things, folks don’t necessarily consider, especially on, and we can get into this more if you’d like, but these relatively new to the game Part B, give back plans that pay some or all of your Medicare premium. You got to think from an insurance company’s perspective, if they’re willing to pay your Medicare premium for you, what do you think that’s going to say about the benefits they’re going to provide in the plan? 

[0:23:31] TU: Yeah. 

[0:23:32] TU: Primarily translates to higher medical bills to you. These are just things that I feel like are important for people to consider that you’re buying a health insurance plan, you want it to be solid when you need it. You don’t necessarily want to buy a plan, because it gives you $100 every quarter and over-the-counter items limit. Those are some of the mistakes I see people making. They buy a plan based off of perks, not necessarily on the day-to-day usage of the plan that could be more important. 

[0:24:04] TU: Yeah. Which is, it’s a different form of marketing, right? It’s not necessarily a commercial, but it’s a different form of marketing to hook someone into a policy. That’s a good a good call out. I think both of those Josh, to me highlight the value and you showed me that worksheet, that side-by-side worksheet of, “Hey, we’re looking at supplement plans, we’re looking at advantage plans.” We’re applying somebody’s personal situation. You’re sitting down with them one-on-one, talking through the benefits and the options. 

That really brings the life to me, the value that an agent, especially someone specializing in Medicare, such as yourself can be helping, whether it’s the person directly that’s selecting the benefits, whether it’s family members that are involved, or for our pharmacist community, again, especially those working in community practice. I know these questions come up all the time in terms of, “Hey, I’m a patient, I go to the pharmacy, I ask my pharmacist about the policy or what should I be thinking.” 

My question here is your work is obviously in Ohio. If we have pharmacists in Northeast Ohio, shout out to Josh, get connected with him for sure as well, but much of our listeners may be across the country. So, words that you would have to share in terms of what are some things that folks can look for in trying to develop a relationship with an agent as a pharmacist or for those that are looking to select a policy for themselves or a family member and partnering with an agent that way, as well. 

[0:25:23] JW: Yeah. I mean, first of all, from the pharmacist’s perspective, I do work with several pharmacists and chains and whatnot. I would say from your perspective, don’t feel like you need to be the expert on Medicare Part D, specifically. You can say, “Hey, I don’t know all the answers on what plan you should pick, but here’s a guy you can call, or here’s a girl you can call, they know. They do this for a living.” The other thing too, guys, is it saves you time. 

I mean, I see, I’m in and out of pharmacies a lot. I see how busy you are. I can imagine how stressful it is when you have 10 or 20 prescriptions you need to fill and somebody asks to go into the private room and say, “Hey, what prescription drug plan is going to be best for me next year?” It can just take up a lot of a lot of time I would imagine. Again, having an agent you can refer to, to handle those questions for you would save you a lot of time and alleviate that pressure of having to feel like an expert. 

[0:26:26] TU: Yeah. Well, this was great, Josh. I really appreciate you coming on the show sharing your expertise. As I mentioned at the beginning, it’s been a long time in the making covering the topic we haven’t done much about before. We will link in the show notes. Josh’s LinkedIn profile, email. If folks have questions, as well as a link to the insurance firm that he works with right now. So, you can check all that information out in the show notes. Josh, thanks so much again for coming on. I really appreciate it. 

[0:26:51] JW: Yeah. Thanks for having me, Tim. Go Bills. 

[0:26:53] TU: That’s all. This is the year. Let’s do it. 

[0:26:55] JW: This is the year, Tim. It’s the year. 

[0:26:57] TU: Awesome. Thanks, man. 

[0:26:58] JW: Yup. 

[0:26:59] TU: Before we wrap up today’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacists podcast, I want to again thank our sponsor, the American Pharmacists Association. APHA is every pharmacist ally advocating on your behalf for better working conditions, fair PBM practices, and more opportunities for pharmacists to provide care. Make sure to join a bolder APHA to gain premier access to financial educational resources and to receive discounts on YFP products and services. You can join APHA at a 25% discount by visiting pharmacist.com/join and using the coupon code YFP. Again, that’s pharmacist.com forward slash join using the coupon code YFP. 

[DISCLAIMER]

[0:27:39] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding material should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment.

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacists, unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward-looking statements, which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements.

For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 328: How to Navigate Open Enrollment & Employer Benefits


Tim Baker, CFP, RICP, RLP joins Tim Ulbrich, PharmD to discuss open enrollment & evaluating employer benefits.

Episode Summary

This week on the podcast, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD sits down with YFP co-owner and Director of Financial Planning, Tim Baker, CFP, RICP, RLP to discuss open enrollment and the process of evaluating employer benefits. They discuss considerations for choosing a health insurance plan, how to determine whether or not your employer-provided life and disability insurance is sufficient, the differences between an FSA, Dependent Care FSA, and HSA, and what to be looking for when putting money into your employer-sponsored retirement plan.

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Tim, glad to have you back on the show.

Tim Baker: Yeah, good to be here, Tim. Looking forward to getting into open enrollment discussion. ‘Tis the season. So yeah, I’m ready for it.

Tim Ulbrich: ‘Tis the season indeed. Fall is in the air officially here in Ohio, which does mean it’s almost time for open enrollment and ensuring that we’re taking the time to understand and maximize employer benefits. And I think whether someone is reviewing their benefits for the first time, whether that’s accepting a new position, going through another round of open enrollment, a lot to consider here, including insurance, retirement accounts and HSAs, FSAs, to name a few. So Tim, our team at YFP Planning includes employer benefits as a part of the planning process, perhaps an area that folks don’t necessarily associate working with their financial planner on. So how does this part, employer benefits, factor into the financial plan? And why is it so important that we’re looking at it in the planning process?

Tim Baker: Yeah, I think this is another area, Tim, where like when we say, “comprehensive,” we mean comprehensive. And it’s just like kind of the same conversation with things like home purchase. Most financial advisors are not going to kind of walk you through kind of the A-Z of buying a home because most of the time, a financial advisor is working with people in their 50s, 60s, 70s, right? And the reason for that is because those are the people that have assets, and that’s how they charge their fee. We have many, many, many clients that are in their 20s and 30s. And things like home purchase is really important and is often a big step in their financial journey and their financial plan. So we kind of take the time to go through that based on, I know you’ve said it, I’ve said it, we’ve messed those transactions up in the past, and we just don’t want to see our clients do the same thing. So open enrollment is kind of the same thing. A lot of financial advisors don’t really talk about this stuff because if you’re working with people in their 50s, 60s, like they’ve done it dozens of times, right? So they’ve gone through this. And a lot of our clients haven’t. You know, it’s not something that is kind of what we understand. And so to define open enrollment, open enrollment is the period of time where you can purchase or apply for health insurance for the upcoming year without a qualifying event. And usually a qualifying event is something like a marriage or a divorce or a birth of a child. So it’s typically very centered on the health insurance plan because that’s the big piece of the benefits. But then what the employer does is kind of have you opt out of other benefits that they might offer, which might be life insurance, disability, I’ve even seen things like pet insurance and things like that. You know, some things that are not insurance-related could be like a legal benefit. So that’s what this is is open enrollment. And it’s important because your employer benefits are a major component of your compensation package. And you know, this is kind of the conversation that goes back to things like salary negotiation is I’ve seen clients, they’ll say, “Hey, I’m making $110,000,” and they get an offer for $120,000 but they take a major step back with regard to their total compensation because of the benefits that are associated with that. I think it’s really important to understand what the employer benefits are and how to assess that. So that’s really what’s at stake here is really understanding that piece. And we know this, Tim, because when we plan to hire someone, we know that it’s not just about the salary pay. We apply a multiple on top of that because we know that the benefits that we’re going to provide for the employee are going to be above and beyond that. So that total cost or what I would say is an investment in that person is really beyond the salary. So this is what is really that bell to that. We’re trying to assess an an employee to say, OK, how can I best optimize this part of my compensation. And I would say that there is a lot, you know, a lot of people that don’t necessarily fully optimize this part of their financial plan or give it the attention that it needs because it sneaks up on us or bad information or what have you. So that’s really kind of the overall picture here of what it is and why it’s important.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and Tim, I think when you say sneaks up on us, bad information, it’s important I think for folks, basic stuff before we jump into individual benefits, you know, know your dates, obviously what’s the time span. You know, a lot of employers, depending on how they organize this, will do informational sessions, open Q&As, one-on-ones, group, and some of that might be automated, depending on the system and the platform they’re using. But making sure, understanding the dates, you know, simple things, how much time do you have if you’re going to be on vacation, things like that, making sure you can coordinate with HR. And then also, you know, just taking a look at your pay stub and your benefits. What do you currently have? And really taking a pulse on — and I think just a chance to go back and what’s gross pay, what’s net pay, what’s coming out in benefits, and taking this time that comes around every year as a chance to revisit some of these things that we want to be looking at often. And then of course, just thinking about upcoming changes, right, that might be happening. You know, I think of things like children that might be beneficiaries on the healthcare side, aging out if you think about 26 or folks that might be expecting or perhaps getting married, things that might have an impact on their benefits, considering those things as you’re in the benefits selection. And then of course just refreshing and updating the evaluation of who are the beneficiaries that are listed on certain policies. Tim, I want to start with health insurance. You know, I think it’s the one that typically carries the biggest price tag as we think about it relative to the other insurance and typically carries more options than things like dental and vision and life and disability, which I think for many employers it’s more of a one-way type of option. So the big question here is how do I determine which one to get? And of course, all plans are created differently but when folks are looking at these and you’re evaluating the deductibles and maximum out-of-pockets and premiums and copays and coinsurance, unfortunately, it’s a system that even though our audience is comfortable with all of those numbers because they live in it in the job that they’ve done or have been trained in it previously, there’s just a lot to consider. And if you look at plans, let’s consider a three-tiered plan where you’ve got like a bronze, silver, gold option, you know, you’re looking at OK, less out of pocket, more out of pocket, better coverage, but perhaps I could have lower out of pocket and I could use that money elsewhere. Like general framework, how do you begin to help clients think through this decision and not just look at it in a silo but also consider it in the context of the rest of the plan?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so I think it’s — you know, everyone can say it with me — it depends, right? So you know, I think a lot of it depends on past history or — you know, you mentioned a few things like what’s kind of on the horizon? Is it getting married or having kids? And some of those will allow you to kind of elect insurance outside of the open enrollment period. But those are typically qualifying events. But you know, an example is when we had Liam, when Shea was pregnant with Liam, we opted out of the bronze package, you know, the HSA plan to more of a gold package because we knew that the doctor bills and the hospital bills were going to be there. Our thought process was, you know, although in most cases we’re not going to the doctor a lot, you know, during a normal year, well, electing to a higher deductible plan, which means less coming out of our paycheck but then when we do go to the doctor, there’s going to be potentially more coming out of our pocket. So we did that to get in front of it a little bit. And you know, that’s really important from a planning perspective and kind of mitigating as much of the costs — and we probably saved ourselves if we did the math $1,000 by doing that. So that’s an important part of the plan. Now, sometimes things are going to come up and you’re just not going to — you know, it’s kind of like that emergency fund. You’re just not going to know for the future. But I would say is it’s a little bit of an exercise in looking at your past history, so looking at how often you’re going to the doctor and how often you’re reaching into your pocket to pay for things like copays and things like that. But then also projecting it forward, so that’s kind of where the conversation starts is that, you know, if you’re a younger, healthy professional and you’re not really going to the doctor, then you probably should really consider kind of a bronze, high-deductible, HDHP plan and couple that with the HSA, which we’ve said is a great forum to stash dollars. If you’re looking at regular doctor visits because of a chronic issue or something like that, that’s not going to be for you, regardless of your age. You just know that you’re going to be in and out of the doctor’s office. So I think it’s really looking at, again, kind of the budget and seeing what money has been spent on healthcare costs in the past and then what you think, project those going forward. And like I said, like this is not — it’s important, but these are taking it like snapshots one year at a time. So you can — like after Liam was born and the medical expenses were gone, then we went back to the high-deductible plan with the HSA. So I think it’s really important to kind of take stock of kind of your history, your medical history, your spending on healthcare, to form the baseline of your decision in that realm. The other comment I would make, Tim, is not all 401k’s are created equal. And as many of us know, not all health plans are created equal. So some are really, really great, and some are really, really terrible. And sometimes, that has to do with the size of the organization, sometimes the economies to scale, the bigger that you are, the less that each participant pays, whether that’s the 401k or the health insurance plan. So you kind of have to work with the sandbox, you know, that you’re playing in, so to speak, and something that can be very much out of your control.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think, Tim, your example of Liam is a great reminder of not putting open enrollment on auto pilot.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think that’s what we’re trying to stress here is like, using this as a chance to re-evaluate each year, you know, what happened last year? What worked last year may or may not be what makes sense for this year for a variety of reasons. And I think this is certainly a place where we want to be evaluating what does the cash position look like? What does the reserves look like? And how do we feel about that? Especially if we’re going to be opting into a high-deductible health plan, you know, thinking worst case scenario — hopefully never happens — looking at those out-of-pocket maxes and really asking yourself, how comfortable are we with that happening? How does that make us feel? And could we weather that storm if it were to come?

Tim Baker: Yeah, and you know, and we’ve had some tough conversations with clients that are deep in credit card debt and they really need as much of their income to kind of like right the ship and get going, so sometimes it means sacrificing or being uncomfortable here. You know, one of the things I look at is like if we look at all the debts that are out there, medical debt is not necessarily a bad debt in terms of like they reformed a lot of things with it hurting your credit because it’s kind of been a nightmare, you’re typically not gouged with higher interest rates and things like that. So typically more forgiven. I would even say push back on a lot of medical debt because it’s wrong. I think Tim, you had a story about that when one of your sons was born. So there’s a little bit more give I would say than some of these other ones that goes like right to collections and you’re in a lot of trouble. So it’s kind of — this is all about like mitigating the risk and trying to understand where can we give a little bit so we’re OK.

Tim Ulbrich: I want to shift gears, Tim, to life and disability. Probably one of the most common questions that we get is, do I need to purchase additional life and disability insurance beyond what my employer covers? And of course the answer is it depends on a large part of the individual’s situation and what they have going on and what they’re trying to do with those policies and so forth. But you know, general thoughts and discussion on how one goes about making this decision in terms of understanding what coverage is there from an employer standpoint, determining what total coverage may be needed, and some of the gap and differences between an employer plan and if they purchased a policy out on the open market.

Tim Baker: I think if we look at most pharmacists out there, you know, professionals that are making a six-figure salary, I think there’s going to come a time when there probably is a need to purchase policies outside of what the employer provides. Now, the problem with the financial services industry is that a lot of “financial advisors” are trying to push those policies on a young professional when they probably don’t need them. That’s when you’re a pharmacist that has maybe six figures of debt that’s going to be forgiven if you die or are disabled with no dependents and really, you know, not much on your balance sheet. So there’s kind of like this gap of do I really need this? Or can I just make do with what my employer provides? I’ll say this about the employer-provided policies: Outside of health insurance, which is a health plan, I would say that things like life and disability insurance are not plans. They’re really perks. So they’re meant to supplement or meant to provide some type of benefit that will help the employee but also it’s a way to kind of retain you and things like that. So I really view these as perks and not necessarily plans. I would say, to your point, Tim, I think it’s really looking at the individual and say OK, does it make sense to buy a policy outside of that? Most employers will provide some type of life insurance benefit, whether it’s something like $50,000 or one or two times income, which you can then elect to either increase your coverage or not. I think the downside of that is, you know, if you’re working for an employer as a 30-year-old and you have all of your eggs in that basket and you’re saying, “Hey, I have $1 million” or a lot of times, they’re capped. Most times, pharmacists need a lot more than what their employer can provide. So that’s one of the drawbacks. But if you’re working with that company for 40 years and then you leave to go to another organization, which maybe that isn’t provided or it’s a lot less of a benefit, you have a gap, then you’re going out in the market 10 years older where you’re paying a lot more for that particular policy. So that’s one of the things that — sometimes they’re portable, meaning that you can take them with you, and sometimes they’re not. So for both the life and disability, you know, it’s really looking at your own situation. Just like open enrollment itself, this is one of the things that often overlooked, just insurance. And I know we’ve probably done a podcast in the past about what’s proper life and disability and things like that.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Tim Baker: For the disability, the coverage is typically going to be a percentage of your income. And again, it could be capped, and some employers will offer both long-term and short-term disability. You know, both are great. But you know, oftentimes, because of one reason or another, there’s going to be a gap in the coverage either because of taxes or just that a pharmacist, what they make and what most professionals will say that you need to kind of cover down and typically, that can be anywhere from 50-80% of what your income is, that there is a need to go out onto the open market and buy individual policies. But from an open enrollment perspective, I think if you don’t have those policies, it’s really important to understand, you know, what is there for you? And what can at least tide you over until you get those policies in place? And again, it’s one of those things where it’s like, it’s not important to you until it’s important to you. And it’s really hard to kind of, to show that to clients unless they’ve experienced that pain themselves or a close family member.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: But it’s going to be a really important piece of protecting the overall financial plan, which is — this is really what this is all about is, you know, insurance is really protecting the financial plan from a catastrophic event and ensuring that you can continue to build wealth and survive into the future.

Tim Ulbrich: Episode 044, Tim, How to Determine Life Insurance Needs, 045, How to Determine Disability Insurance Needs, two that we’ll link to in the show notes. We’ve got more information on the website as well, YourFinancialPharmacist.com. Tim, I think one of the common mistakes I see made here just relating to that discussion on gap in coverage is not digging into the policies to really understand, you know, life insurance is maybe the most obvious example where if you have a policy — if you have a need for life insurance and you have a term policy that’s offered for $50,000 or $100,000 or one times salary or two times salary, typically, those have a cap on them. For many folks, there’s going to be a gap and a shortage. And I think this is where, you know, sitting down one-on-one with someone to really calculate the total need, think about the transferability issues that you mentioned and what does it mean if you pick up employment, tax considerations, and really getting into the weeds of some of the nuances of the policies and things like own occupation, we’ve talked about that before and its importance. And again, thinking about how this fits in with the rest of the plan. And just a shoutout here to our fee-only financial planning team at YFP Planning, this is really where I think the value of fee-only comes in in that really sitting down with someone to determine what is their true need in their best interests. Not too much coverage that there’s dollars being spent that could be put elsewhere in the financial plan, but making sure we’re also not exposing the plan to unnecessary risk.

Tim Baker: Yeah, I mean, you know, this — what we’re talking about here are products. Like insurance is a product. So any time that you talk about dispensing a device, “Hey, Tim, you need life insurance,” and you say, “OK, great. Like where do I get it?” Like we can sell you this product. There’s going to be a conflict of interest. So having someone that is a fee-only fiduciary that is not further enriched by the advice that they’re giving, you know, strips away a lot of that, well, am I being advised in my best interests or in the advisor’s best interests, the one that’s advising me. So that’s I think the beauty of fee-only.

Tim Ulbrich: One example I just want to give here, I just pulled up, Tim, our long-term disability coverage that we added recently for the YFP team.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: And you know, if you look at it on kind of the main benefits platform, it says, “60% monthly income up to $6,000.” But this is an example where digging deeper is so valuable. You know, you get into things like what is the definition of earnings? So our policy, it’s base wage. So how you’re compensated could have an impact here.

Tim Baker: Yep.

Tim Ulbrich: What’s the elimination period or the timeframe from when the disability happens to when the benefit starts to pay out? Here, it’s 90 days. But if it’s shorter than that, perhaps longer than that, what’s the game plan to fund. Does it have own occupation coverage? We’ve talked about the importance of that before. What’s the maximum benefit? Our policy goes up to age 65. And then things like coverage restrictions, other incentives. So really, just a reminder of this time period and using this point here to really dig into this information and read the policies.

Tim Baker: Yeah, you know, and again, going back to those episodes you mentioned there, that’s where we kind of talk about the nitty-gritty, but I think the beautiful thing about this is like when we’re reviewing this and we kind of look at the — kind of go through the open enrollment optimization stuff is like as a planner, I’m looking at your balance sheet. So I’m like, alright, does it make sense to bolster — you know, because a lot of these, you can opt in. So like our policy doesn’t do this, but a lot of policies, they’ll say, “The employer pays for a 60% benefit of your earnings.” But then you can opt in to get that up to 80%. So you pay an additional — you pay out of pocket out of your paycheck for that additional 20%. If I’m looking at your balance sheet, Tim, and I’m saying, “Man, you have plenty of cash,” I would say, “Let’s not opt into that.” Or we might say, “Let’s do it,” because we know because the employer is going to pay for it, that that benefit’s going to be taxed.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Tim Baker: If the employer pays for the benefit, it’s going to be taxed. That’s the gap. You know, so the idea is looking at your situation and overlaying what’s out there. I think the open enrollment, what I say is we want to look at the things that you’re paying for and say, does it make sense for you to be paying for it? I see a lot of AD&D insurance, and I kind of look at this as like — and again, this is not advice — but I kind of look at those as like when you buy something at Best Buy and they ask you about the warranty. You know, most of the time, you say no because it’s just not worth the money. Some of these things in open enrollment, it’s the same thing. It’s like AD&D, for those to pay out is very rare. So even if it’s $2 per pay period, I’m like, I just don’t think it’s worth it. So we’re trying to make sure that you’re not paying for things that don’t necessarily provide you much benefit, much utility. But then you are paying for things that do. And you know, kind of finding that Venn diagram of sorts to make sure that, again, we’re fully optimized with regard to this part of your compensation package.

Tim Ulbrich: AD&D, for folks that are wondering, Accidental Death & Dismemberment insurance.

Tim Baker: Oh yeah. Yep.

Tim Ulbrich: Tim Baker dropping some financial lingo here.

Tim Baker: Sorry about that. Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: Tim, next I want to talk about FSAs, dependent care FSAs, especially since we’ve had some changes that have happened there as well as HSAs. And we’ve talked probably among these to the greatest extent, we’ve talked about HSAs because of the value of what that can provide as well as these other options. And we’ve talked about it on the podcast, we’ve got some blog posts, Episode 165, The Power of a Health Savings Account, also have an article on the blog, which we’ll link to, about really more of the strategic investing side of an HSA if you’re able to do that. So Tim, high level overview, FSA, dependent care FSA, HSA, and some of the differences and considerations for these accounts.

Tim Baker: The very crude way that I remember the difference between FSA and HSA is FSAs are really use-or-lose. So when you fund these with pre-tax dollars, if you don’t use those monies for the purposes of healthcare for an FSA for healthcare or dependent care for a dependent care FSA, you lose it. So it’s F-udge. Like I don’t get — you don’t get to use that money. Whereas the HSA, this is — can potentially be an accrual account, meaning that year over year, you can stack Benjamins and hopefully one day becomes that kind of stealth IRA that we talk about that has that triple tax benefit. So like I said, we’ve talked about the HSA ad nauseum. It has to be paired with a high-deductible health plan. You know, you can put the money in. It has a triple tax benefit, which means it goes in pre-tax, it grows tax-free so you can invest it like an IRA, and then you can distribute it in the near term for approved medical costs or when you reach a certain age, you can use it basically for whatever. So that’s the beauty of the HSA. But you know, again, it only works or you only have access to it when it’s paired with a high-deductible health plan. The FSA for healthcare is similar, but very different. So you’re allowed to use — you’re allowed to fund it with pre-tax dollars, meaning if you make $100,000 and you put $1,000 in there, you’re taxed on as if $99,000. So I think the limits for FSA for 2021, I think it’s like $2,750.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s right. Yep.

Tim Baker: Yeah. So the idea is that what you’re trying to do here — it’s a little bit of a game of chicken. So what you’re trying to do is really, again, see into the future and say, “OK, what do I know is a baseline that I’m going to use on my out-of-pocket healthcare expenses?” And if you know for sure that you’re going to spending $2,000 on that, then you should fund it with $2,000. And typically, there is a little bit of give at the end of the year where you can either carry some over or you have some time into the New Year to use it on.

Tim Ulbrich: Two months or —

Tim Baker: Yeah. And every plan is going to be different in its design. So you might be loading up on kind of some of the over-the-counter stuff. I’ve had a client buy a bunch of stuff for like contacts and things like that. So it’s going to be really important to kind of — again, this goes back to the spending plan, the budget, to understand what have you been spending in the past? Is that going to be indicative of what you will spend in the future? And then fund that with at least that baseline amount so you don’t lose it. The same thing can be said for the dependent care FSA. So this is a pre-tax account that you can fund that is used for care for your child who is age 13, for before- and after-school care, babysitting, nanny expenses, daycare, nursery school, preschool, summer day camp, and then also care for a spouse or a relative who is physically or mentally unable to care for themselves and lives in your home. So this money — this has actually been amended under the American Rescue Plan Act. So I think for single and married filing jointly couples, the pre-tax contribution limit went from where you could $5,000 a year, now it’s I think $10,500.

Tim Ulbrich: Significant jump. Yep.

Tim Baker: Yeah, very significant. So the higher limits apply to the plan year beginning Dec. 31, 2020 and before Jan. 1, 2022. So it is a temporary thing, but it allows you to park some dollars that you would otherwise — so if you’re in a 25% tax bracket, it’s as if you’re saving 25%, kind of thinking about it that way. So that’s what really — and for the FSAs, unlike the HSA, the FSA is — it has to be provided by the employer. I think we had a question on the Ask a YFP CFP about the HSA. And you don’t have to necessarily go through your employer. Sometimes, the employer doesn’t offer it. So you can go out and set up your own HSA. The FSA has to be provided by the employer for you to have access to it. So that’s really important. Again, these are all going to be — when you elect it, it’s going to take money out of your paycheck and basically fund these accounts for the appropriate purpose.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and this to me is where when we’ve talked with Paul Eikenberg, our director of tax, and working with our clients, one of the things he talks about here is these being untapped areas of potential.

Tim Baker: Totally.

Tim Ulbrich: And so I think there’s a lot of low-hanging fruit in the financial plan. And I think really evaluating these and perhaps the dollars of any one don’t jump out as being super significant, but I think as we start to add these up with other strategies, there certainly is value. And Tim, you had mentioned we did tackle a question recently on Ask a YFP CFP 084. The question was about fees on an HSA account, but we did talk about the opportunity to access an HSA account independent of the employer. So we’ve talked about health insurance, we’ve talked about life and disability, we’ve talked about FSAs and HSAs and dependent care FSAs. I want to wrap up our discussion by retirement saving options. And I think, again, this is an opportunity to take a step back, look at the overall progress on the investing part of the plan, overall goals, perhaps gap between the goals and where you’re currently at, and then to evaluate where does investing fit in with the rest of the financial plan. And so when we think about, Tim, employer-sponsored retirement accounts, two main buckets we have, which are those that are Roth contributions and those that are traditional. So define for us the difference between those two for folks that are — maybe have some outstanding questions about those or unsure as well as the limits of what we’re able to do in 2021.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so — and I’ll preface this by saying that most of — you know, open enrollment is a good time to check in on your retirement savings options. You’re not necessarily bound to that because you can go in —

Tim Ulbrich: Correct.

Tim Baker: — really at any time and say, “Hey, I was putting in 5%. I talked to a YFP planner, and they said I should put in 8%. That’ll put me on track to get my $5 million nest egg, so that’s what I want to do.” I can really do that at any time. Or I can say, “I want less Roth and more traditional,” or whatever the case is. So it’s just a good opportunity, it’s a good checkpoint to say, OK, where am I at and should I make any tweaks? So — and one of the things that they often do here is they allow you to put in an escalator. So you know — and you can do this any time too, but it’s a good thing to do in open enrollment so every year, you can increase that by 1% or 2% or whatever that looks like. So to answer your question, Tim, the Roth v. traditional, so most employers will offer a 401k or a 403b or if you work for the government, a TSP. So when you elect your retirement options here, a lot of them will now — you’ll have a traditional — so think of two buckets. You’ll have a traditional 401k and a Roth 401k.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Tim Baker: And they’re all under the same plan, but they segregate the monies because for a traditional, these are pre-tax dollars. So that example I gave you is if you put in $1,000 into your 401k and you make $100,00 — your traditional 401k — and you make $100,000, you’re taxed as if you made $99,000. For a Roth, it’s after-tax. So same example, if you put $1,000 into your Roth 401k and you make $100,000, you are taxed as if you made $100,000 because you’re not getting that pre-tax deduction. So for these dollars, the money is either taxed going in or coming out. So for a traditional, you’re not taxed going in, but then it grows tax-free inside of that account, and then you’re taxed when it is distributed, hopefully in retirement. For the Roth 401k, you’re taxed going in, so you don’t get that deduction, but then it grows tax-free and when it comes out, it’s not taxed because it’s already been taxed going in. So a lot of people will say Roth, Roth, Roth. And again, it’s going to depend on your plan. It’s going to depend on what you’re trying to achieve. And a lot of people get this wrong as well. So this is another good check on it to make sure that you’re putting the dollars in the right spot. Your match that your employer provides, if there is a match, is always going to go into a traditional account.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Tim Baker: So if there is a match, you’re going to have — some people get it twisted like, I’m 100% in my Roth 401k, but I see money in my traditional, like what gives? And I’m like, well, this is the money that your employer is matching. It’s going to go there, you know, regardless. So it’s really important, you know — so to kind of give you some numbers with 2021, to max out a 401k, a 403b, it’s $19,500. So you can put that in regardless of how much money you make. So that’s really going to be the limit for the 401k. IRAs are a completely different animal. They’re $6,000, this completely separate accounting mechanism. And that’s going to be dependent on your income whether you can put it in directly into a Roth or a traditional IRA and if you get the deduction. And I know we’ve had podcasts on that as well. But the point of this, Tim, is that the open enrollment exercise is a great opportunity to kind of just do a once-over for your retirement savings options and just make sure that one, you’re in the proper allocation but then it’s also in the Roth v. traditional, and then just making sure that you don’t get stuck in that hey, my employer matches 3%, so for 10 years, I’ve just been putting in 3%. You don’t want to do that because more often than not, it’s not going to be enough for you to retire comfortably. So this is another way to kind of check those things and push the envelope a little bit.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I point folks back to Episode 074, when we talked about evaluating your 401k plan, also more recently, Episode 208, when we talked about why minimizing fees on your investments is so important. Certainly relevant here as we talk about employer-sponsored retirement plans where we can see a lot of variabilities in those investment options and in the fees. As we’ve said a couple times now throughout the show, open enrollment is such a great time to take a step back and evaluate the financial plan. And for folks that are going through this process and think, you know, I really see the value in working with someone one-on-one to look at the financial plan holistically, to determine how to prioritize the goals, make some of these decisions around open enrollment, could be debt repayment, investing, tax evaluation, and so forth. We’d love to have a chance to talk with you about the YFP Planning comprehensive financial planning services that we conduct on a one-on-one basis. And you can learn more about those services as well as schedule a free discovery call by going to YFPPlanning.com. As always, thank you so much for listening. We hope you have a great rest of your week and look forward to having you join us again next week.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 326: #PharmGradWishlist: Supporting Racially & Ethnically Minoritized Pharmacist Trainees


Drs. Lindsey Childs-Kean and Britny Brown share their work with #PharmGradWishlist to support emerging racially and ethnically minoritized pharmacy trainees.

Episode Summary

It is no secret that there are minorities underrepresented in pharmacy despite the evidence suggesting that racial concordance matters. Joining us today are two individuals, Lindsey Childs-Kean and Britny Brown, who are committed to improving representation by supporting emerging racially and ethnically minoritized pharmacy trainees. You’ll hear about the incredible PharmGradWishlist organization, what its mission is, why it’s important, and how to get involved.

About Today’s Guest

  • Lindsey Childs-Kean is a Clinical Associate Professor in the Department of Pharmacotherapy and Translational Research with the University of Florida College of Pharmacy. She earned her PharmD degree from University of Florida and completed a PGY1 residency at Tampa General Hospital and a PGY2 Infectious Diseases residency at the South Texas Veterans Healthcare System.  Her teaching, research, and practice interests include infectious disease pharmacotherapy and professional development of students and new practitioners. She is active in many professional organizations, including being a member of the PharmGradWishList Leadership Team and an Associate Editor for the American Journal of Pharmaceutical Education.

  • Britny Brown, PharmD, BCOP is a Clinical Associate Professor at the University of Rhode Island. Her clinical practice site is Smilow Cancer Center in Westerly, RI, where she focuses on the management of patients receiving oral anticancer therapy. Britny also has a passion for health equity. She is co-chair of the Diversity and Globalization Committee within URI’s College of Pharmacy, is a leadership team member for PharmGradWishlist, and is a member of the HOPA DEI Advisory Group.

Key Points From the Episode

  • Welcoming Lindsey Childs-Kean and Britny Brown and why they were drawn to this field.
  • All about PharmGradWishlist and what the goal is. 
  • How PharmGradWishlist got started and what inspired our guests to get involved. 
  • Why underrepresentation matters in this profession and healthcare at large. 
  • The differences between internal and external support for minorities in the pharmacy field. 
  • Financial issues minorities, in particular, face as they transition to pharmaceutical residency. 
  • How listeners can learn more about PharmGradWishlist and get involved in their mission. 
  • What’s in the cards for the future of PharmGradWishlist.

Episode Highlights

[PharmGrad Wishlist’s] mission is to promote equity by sponsoring racially and ethnically minoritized pharmacists and pharmacists’ trainees as they progress through the profession.” — @HemeOncPharm [0:03:32]

“Racial concordance does correlate to improved health outcomes, increased patient satisfaction, decreased emergency room utilization, and decreased health care utilization.” @HemeOncPharm [0:13:25]

What we’re focused on doing with PharmGradWishlist is supporting those individuals who are in pharmacy school and in the pharmacy profession, as they move through the profession.” — @corevalues5 [0:16:28]

“We’ve told you about what we’ve done [in] the last two years and we really think we’re just getting started [with PharmGradWishlist]”@corevalues5 [0:24:55]

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[0:00:01] TU: Hey, everybody. Tim Ulbrich here. Thank you for listening to the YFP Podcast, where each week we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. This week, I welcome Lindsey Childs-Kean, and Britny Brown to the show to talk about PharmGradWishlist and the vision they have to support racially and ethnically minoritized pharmacy trainees. We discuss the inspiration for PharmGradWishlist, the impact that it’s having, and how others can get involved. 

Before we jump into my conversation with Lindsey and Britny, let’s hear a brief message from YFP team member Justin Woods. 

[YFP MESSAGE]

[0:00:33] JW: Hey, Your Financial Pharmacists community. This is Justin Woods here, Director of Business Development at YFP. You may be one of the 13,000 pharmacists that have already signed up for YFP Money Matters, which is our weekly newsletter, but if you’re not, what are you waiting for? I want to invite you to subscribe. We send financial tips, recommendations, the latest podcast episode, and money resources, all specifically for pharmacists. It all comes straight to your inbox every Friday morning, so visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/newsletter, or click the link in the show notes to subscribe today. Again, that’s yourfinancialpharmacist.com/newsletter. See you there. 

[INTERVIEW]

[0:01:19] TU: Lindsey and Britny, welcome to the show. 

[0:01:21] LCK: Thanks for having us, Tim. 

[0:01:22] BB: Thank you so much. We’re very excited to be here.

[0:01:24] TU: Lindsey, let’s have you kick us off by introducing yourself to our listeners, including what drew you into the profession and the work that you’re doing now. 

[0:01:35] LCK: I’m Lindsey Childs-Kean. I’m a clinical associate professor at the University of Florida College of Pharmacy. My clinical area of specialty is infectious diseases, but I do most of my time as a faculty member teaching and mentoring pharmacy students. I could talk a long time about how I got into pharmacy school because I took a very weird trajectory to pharmacy school. Basically, I ended up making the decision that in looking at the healthcare system, there was so much that pharmacists could do that I wanted to be a part of that. So, that’s why I went to pharmacy school. Then I also have a master’s of public health degree and my specialty was global infectious diseases. That’s how I got into the infectious disease area and did two years of residency, including an infectious disease residency after pharmacy school. 

[0:02:25] TU: Great. Britny, how about for you? 

[0:02:27] BB: Yeah. Thanks for having us. I’m a clinical associate professor, as well, at the University of Rhode Island. My area of focus is oncology. I would say my trajectory into where I am now started with just being interested in pharmacy, learning more about medications, and how we can improve health outcomes. Getting into cancer care, I was initially really intimidated, because it’s a different language, but seeing the impact that we can have is what drove me towards specifically working with that patient population. 

[0:02:59] TU: Great. Well, we are excited to have both of you. While you had great pharmacy careers, that’s not what we’re here to talk about today. We’re going to be focusing rather on the work that you and others are doing in leading through the PharmGradWishlist. Britny, let’s start with you. Tell us more about PharmGradWishlist. What’s the mission? How did it get started? What’s the goal? What are you trying to achieve? 

[0:03:21] BB: Absolutely. PharmGradWishlist is a mutual aid organization of 10 practicing pharmacists across the country that make up our leadership team. Our mission is to promote equity by sponsoring racially and ethnically minoritized pharmacists and pharmacists’ trainees as they progress through the profession. We did model this after a similar movement in the medical community called MedGradWishlist. It’s evolved to more than just wish lists. That part stems from individuals, trainees usually, making Amazon wish lists and what they need to enter into their pharmacy profession. 

It might be a variety of different things, office supplies to help them get started, study materials, and sponsors nationally can work through and identify individuals they’d like to sponsor as they enter their career. In addition, we’ve also created a scholarship program for the last two years now going into our third year for individuals that are seeking postgraduate training. We have some stats with that. 

Our first year, we sponsored $2,500 scholarships. In our second year, which was 2022 through this spring, we sponsored 39 scholarships. That encompassed actually just 85 unique donors. The large vast majority of donors actually contributed a significant amount to our sponsees. We really hope to continue that momentum and bring our movement to other people’s attention. I’ll let Lindsey talk a little bit more about what else we’ve done with our movement as well. 

[0:05:03] LCK: Yeah. Also, to note, in addition to that number of scholarships that we’ve done over two years, we also have had well over a hundred wish lists each year that have been available for sponsors to choose to support our sponsees. Outside of the wish lists and scholarships, those are obviously our two really big initiatives that we do each year. We’ve also been able to work with a number of racially and ethnically minoritized trainees in publishing, commentaries, and other types of articles. 

We have at least five published papers to date, depending upon when this goes live. If something else might be published by then, and we’ve got some others in the works. So, we encourage the listeners to go read those publications. We also – because we are recruiting sponsors and sponsees, we put a big focus on communications. We have a website. We also have a blog, where we will write about different issues that are related to racial and ethnic concerns. 

We’re also active on multiple social media platforms. So basically, if there’s a social media platform, we’re probably there. One other thing that we have looked or to expand out is partnering with other pharmacy organizations, both national and state level and regional organizations. These take different flavors of what we do to help support their trainees in that particular area or within their mission and scope. 

[0:06:37] TU: If I heard the two of you correctly, really three major areas, scholarships, wish lists, and now on the publication dissemination of information with an expansion going out to organizations and opportunities for them to get involved as well. Really incredible work. First of all, congratulations. I mean, to see the grassroots efforts of that. I mean, 20 to 39 scholarships. I mean, that’s a big impact. There are over 300,000 pharmacists in the country, right? Britny, I think you mentioned somewhere in the 75, 80-ish donors that went –

[0:07:11] BB: Yeah. 85 donors this year Yeah.

[0:07:13] TU: 85. What an awesome opportunity. We’ll talk about that at the end of the show, as well. For folks that want to get involved. Let’s do it, right? Great work that’s being done, but also great opportunities that are still to be had as you look to grow the impact that your work is doing. Lindsey, my question here is why get involved with PharmGradWishlist, right? There’s lots of different opportunities to give back, to be involved. Certainly, this is an investment of your time, as well as the others that are on the leadership team. What really is the motivation for you to get involved? 

[0:07:46] LCK: Some of our backstory is that pharm, the leadership team really formed over the social media platform that used to be called Twitter. One of our leadership team members said, “Hey, there’s this MedGradWishlist thing going on. Why don’t we do it in pharmacy?” It was an informal call for others to get involved. The more I looked into it, I really gravitated towards the very tangible method of support. It’s one thing to donate money or time to a big national organization, but you don’t always know where that money and time and effort are going to. Whereas with this, I know very specifically. 

If I buy a set of scrubs for a trainee who’s going to be starting residency in a couple of months, that’s very tangible or if I donate money towards a scholarship, I see that money going directly to that recipient. It’s a very tangible way to support our efforts to diversify and make our profession more equitable. That’s what drew me to PharmGradWishlist. 

[0:09:01] TU: Yeah. I really like what you said there. I recently had on the podcast, Tom Dauber, who has a career in advancement and giving, working with institutions, most notably colleges of pharmacy. One of the questions I asked him is what are donors often looking for, right? Is there making a selection or a choice of a gift? He talked exactly about what you said impact, right? Being able to see or feel directly, not only that there’s an alignment there of something that they care about, but that they also can be able to see that change or see the impact that that gift is happening. Britny, what about for you? What was the motivation, the inspiration for your involvement? 

[0:09:39] BB: Similar to Lindsey, I was just felt very lucky that our colleague Betsy had reached out to us, identifying that we’re all like-minded individuals that wanted to see change in terms of representation in our profession. I think probably similar to many of our listeners, not many of us knew where to start, right? There was an infrastructure that existed to help make that change. I think that’s what PharmGradWishlist provides, right? That tangible impact that Lindsey was talking about, but also giving you the infrastructure. 

Hopefully, it makes our supporters easily able to access that, right? To see change tangibly in a short period of time, but also to not have to do much work to get there. You just click a link, provide your money or decide what you want to give to someone on their wish list. It’s really as easy as five minutes of your time. 

[0:10:36] TU: You guys have done a great job with the website. I think it very succinctly talks about what you’re doing, why you’re doing it. For those that are eager to go look at that, we’ll mention at the end as well, link to it in the show notes. It’s pharmgradwishlist.org. Again, it’s pharmgradwishlist.org. I want to talk a little bit, and Britny, I’m going to start with you and Lindsey, feel free to jump in as well. 

There was a commentary that the two of you, as well as a group of others, were involved with, published in JAPhA in 2022, we’ll link to it in the show notes. The title was Brighter Horizons: The Necessity of Concentrated Sponsorship Targeted Toward Minoritized Student Pharmacists. Talking a lot about the why and the how of what you’ve been building at at PharmGradWishlist. Britny, perhaps an obvious question, but one that I feel needs to be asked is, why does this mission matter? Why does under-representation matter in our profession and health care at large? 

Let me read one passage from the commentary and then get your take on it. That passage is, “Since the American Association of Colleges of Pharmacy began reporting data on races and ethnicities of student pharmacists in 1985, students who identify as Black, Hispanic, or Latinx, American Indian, or Alaska Native have enrolled and graduated at disproportionately lower rates compared with their demographic makeup and the US population.” Why does that matter? 

[0:12:00] BB: That’s a great question. I’m so glad that you’re asking it. I think we hear a lot of representation matters, right, regardless of whether we’re talking about pharmacy, medicine, politics, seeing oneself in their profession helps others to envision that they could potentially one day be there. We’re pharmacists. We like data. There is data that exists in the healthcare realm that having representation improves health outcomes. 

Much of this data stems from medicine, doctors that have decreased morbidity and mortality when they have racially concordant providers. That’s there. We know that it decreases mortality with physicians. Unfortunately, that data hasn’t been found yet in pharmacy specifically, however, there has been data that looks at how we improve adherence just by being racially concordant. One could potentially extrapolate that to say, if you’re more adherent to your diabetes medications, you’re more likely to gain control of your diabetes, likewise with hypertension and cancer. 

I think that it’s just an opportunity for us to do more research in this area. It’s something that we’re certainly advocating for our pharmacy colleagues to pursue, but we do know that overall, within medicine, that racial concordance does correlate to improved health outcomes, increased patient satisfaction, decreased emergency room utilization, and decreased health care utilization for sick visits and things like that. There’s certainly a precedent that we could set with our research if we have the resources to pursue it. 

[0:13:49] TU: Which goes back, I think, so well to the mission, right? You’ve got some tangible opportunities for people to get involved in needs that are there right now. Then when you talk about the research, the publication, the efforts as more individuals, as more organizations get involved in this, obviously those resources can be really important to allow that research work to be happening and hopefully to add to the literature, you know, what’s currently is missing in the pharmacy profession. 

Let me continue to put you on the hot seat while I have you there, Britny. In the commentary, it also mentions, “Dismantling structural racism within pharmacy programs requires evaluation of internal and external factors and creation of novel methods to support these students in a holistic manner.” What are a couple key points as it relates to internal versus external and the difference between those? 

[0:14:37] BB: Yeah. That’s a great question too. I like to think of internal as within our own pharmacy programs. Whatever structure we have in place, which might include policies, procedures, our institutional status quo, what have we been doing for the last 100 years that might be inherently racist and how do we examine that through an equity lens to see how we might better support our students, right? What microaggressions are occurring in the classroom between professors and students, students to students that we can improve upon to make students feel like they are empowered to succeed in school and then their profession. How do we retain our diverse learners? 

Then externally, I would think of that more as how do we bring diverse people into our profession. Externally, as you said, we don’t have good racial representation. How do we, in a world that is inherently racist, engage people who hadn’t traditionally seen themselves in our profession or maybe don’t have the same opportunities to accessing postgraduate training as an example? I think those are – that’s the lens that I view it in. I think there’s a lot of different nuances to it that we probably can’t – don’t have the time to get into today, but maybe just some surface-level viewpoints. 

[0:16:03] LCK: Yeah. I think one of the things to take away from this is one initiative is not going to solve all these problems. PharmGradWishlist has a very specific mission that we’ve already laid out. We’re not going to do anything about those upstream factors that are preventing diverse groups of people that are getting into pharmacy school, but what we’re focused on doing with PharmGradWishlist is supporting those individuals who are in pharmacy school and in the pharmacy profession, as they move through the profession. We at this point aren’t able to tackle every problem out there, no initiative is. We had to pick something to focus on. This is, as we’ve said, a very tangible way to support the individuals so that hopefully, they are able to bridge the issues and structural racism that they’ve had to face to get to the point that they’re even at. 

[0:17:05] TU: Yeah. Speaking of very specific ways to get involved, Lindsey. One of the things that that commentary I think does a nice job of calling out is when we think about residency as just one example, of other efforts that you have ongoing. One thing is that even in talking about this every week some of the connections that may not be so obvious is, hey, traditional financial aid, right, which can lead to student indebtedness and other challenges, but there’s access to resource there does not extend to those additional costs, right? 

When we think about what we often see as somebody who goes through their P4 year, they transition into residency or in a fellowship, it is a very difficult financial time, right? Especially if they’re applying out of state, application costs, licensure, moving, new things that come with any type of transition like that. Just talk more about why that transition is so important and why PharmGradWishlist is wanting to really have an impact. For that group where, again, financially, it may not play a role in being able to support those students. 

[0:18:10] LCK: You’re absolutely right, Tim. Students get a set amount, a set maximum amount of money every year. That doesn’t matter if you are all of a sudden in your last year of pharmacy school and want to pursue postgraduate training and in all likelihood, that’s going to entail some professional clothing to do an interview, likely travel to do interviews, although more and more programs are doing virtual interviews, which that does sometimes help level the playing field a little bit. Those things just to get to the interview point.

In addition to the fees for applications through forecasts and all of that. Then once you get to, as you mentioned, the transition financial aid ends after that last semester. There’s licensing fees. There are moving fees. Lots of different things that happen. A lot of our students, once they start their first job, they are also in the process of setting up some kind of living arrangement, an apartment or house or something like that. These wish lists are meant for them to put whatever it is that they need for that. 

Again, I bought everything from reference textbooks, to kitchen utensils, to scrubs, to really nice-looking pillows so that they can sleep well off of these wish lists. Not having some financial backing of parents or other individuals is very common in our students and trainees who come from racially and ethnically minoritized groups. They don’t have that extra cushion, like I did in pharmacy school where I was like, “Hey, dad, I need an extra $500.” For whatever it was when I was transitioning to residency. A lot of them don’t have that. That’s where the wish lists and the scholarships come into play, where that is again, tangible money or items that they need in those times where money is probably even more tight than it is to begin with. 

[0:20:28] TU: Yeah. I think the further, well said, the further we get from graduation or some of us were in these shoes. I think the harder it is for us to remember the feeling that that was, right? I often talk with students and those transitioning that just have this overwhelming feeling as if they’re drowning financially, right? They’ve got these things that they want to pursue, but there’s just so many transition things that are happening. Obviously, student loans are coming back online. They’re making moves, as you mentioned. 

We actually have an article on our site. I was just pulling up as we were talking here that Brandon Dyson from TLDR wrote a few years ago on the cost of the pharmacy residency quest, and he broke it down into three phases, the application, the mid-year trip, and then the interview. That doesn’t even account for any of the costs with the transition, right? Once you actually start that residency. When you start to add these things up, like in the application, you’ve got registration for the match, registration for payment for the forecast applications, potentially transcripts that you have to acquire. 

Then you have the mid-year trip if you’re pursuing that and all of the travel and costs that come with that. Then obviously the travel and costs that come with the interview as well. You start to stack some of this up and it adds up. That typically is a year where financially, because experiential rotations are often a significant financial burden for students. This is something even on top of that as well that causes some stress. Such a necessary, I think effort to help those students in the transition. 

Britny with that in mind is people are listening to this and say, “Hey, I want to help. I want to support. I want to get involved.” Whether that’s with the scholarships, whether that’s with the GradWishlist, whether that’s just staying up to date with what you guys are doing, some of the research that you’re doing. What’s the best place that people can go to learn more and as well to get involved with support? 

[0:22:21] BB: Absolutely. Our website that you mentioned pharmgradwishlist.org is a great place to start. You can actually sign up for our email list at the bottom of the website. If you scroll all the way down, enter in your email, any page on that website to stay up to date on what’s going on. We will send out communication with scholarships and wish list go live. In addition, we have social media platforms on Twitter or X as it’s now called, as well as Instagram on both our handle is pharmgradwish. Then on LinkedIn, we are PharmGradWishlist. You can find us on Facebook as well. 

[0:23:02] TU: Awesome. What about individuals? I think many people listening are probably interested in getting involved as an individual, but if someone is a leader within an organization, whether it’s an association, as was mentioned previously, whether it’s a for-profit company and they want to get involved with making a donation. Are there opportunities for organizations, companies to get involved as well? 

[0:23:25] BB: Absolutely. I think probably the best way if you’re interested in having a higher level of support would be to email us at [email protected] or you could contact us through our website. Either of those should be good ways to get started. That being said, if you are an institution, we have had individuals rally their departments and their colleagues to support scholarships. We’ve had a few instances where they supported multiple scholarships, which was amazing. 

Then of course, just helping to get the word out is extremely impactful. As we mentioned earlier with our scholarships, we had 85 sponsors. Imagine if we could reach even 1,000, which is still just a fraction of practicing pharmacists in the United States. So, help us get the word out, share through your institutional newsletters and email lists serves when the time comes that our scholarships are live and wish lists are live. 

[0:24:27] TU: Awesome. We’ll link to that email address as well. You mentioned [email protected] for those that want to reach out with questions or I know we have business owners listening. I know we have organization leaders listening that can either, potentially, get involved from a donation in that standpoint, individually or getting their constituents and members involved as well. Lindsey, what does the future hold? What are some of the future directions for ParmGradWishlist? 

[0:24:53] LCK: Yeah. We’re excited. We’ve told you about what we’ve done the last two years and we really think we’re just getting started. We’re looking into additional partnerships with national pharmacy organizations to expand our reach to both trainees that could be sponsees, as well as sponsors to help support our sponsees. We are looking into pursuing nonprofit status. Up until now, it’s been just us doing the work, but we’re looking to potentially be more formal as a nonprofit organization. Which we do hope that if we pursue that and then eventually get a 501(c)(3) designation. We hope that will also drive interest in supporting our initiative. 

Then as we expand, we have also talked about maybe setting up a committee structure, where we might be able to bring additional people on board to do some of the work of the initiative. Again, the website and being signed up for the email listserv are the best places to keep up to date on how all of those things, progress. Highly recommend going to the website pharmgradwishlist.org and signing up for the email alerts. I promise we don’t send very many. It’s only when we have big things that are happening. 

[0:26:15] TU: Awesome. Well, that will be the challenge to our community. Make sure you’re informed with the work that is being done at PharmGradWishlist. You’ve got the website pharmgradwishlist.org, you can sign up for the newsletter if you’re ready to make a donation and get involved. You can do that as well. Let me wrap up our time by reading a couple of the words of support that you have from sponsees on your website that I think encapsulates so well the impact that you all are having and the work that is being done. 

The first one is from a 2021 grad who said, “I wanted to reach out and thank you all for the amazing work you’re doing with the PharmGradWishlist. You’ve taken the time out of your busy schedules to do this wonderful act of kindness for your future colleagues and it hasn’t gone unnoticed. As a graduating student, I am awe-inspired by the amount of care and effort you have put into this initiative. Thank you for all your hard work. You are changing lives.” 

From another recent grad, “My goals after graduation are to care for the underserved population and bridge health disparities through direct patient care as a community pharmacist in my home state. Going forward, I hope to become a mentor to other first-generation, Asian-Americans with goals of becoming a pharmacist as I know how difficult it can be when it comes to preparing and applying for a competitive program with little guidance. With graduation just around the corner, I am extremely grateful to PharmGradWishlist and the entire family for helping me transition from a student pharmacist to a pharmacist.” 

Amazing words there. I think just so well, really again encapsulate the work that you all are doing. The impact that it has and for those that are looking to get involved to make a donation, the impact that that donation is going to have. Britny and Lindsey, thank you so much for taking time to come on the show to share the journey and I look forward to following the success ahead. 

[0:27:54] LCK: Thanks so much for having us, Tim. 

[0:27:56] BB: Thank you.

[DISCLAIMER]

[0:27:58] ANNOUNCER: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding material should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment.

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacists, unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward-looking statements, which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements.

For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 325: Retirement Roadblocks: Identifying and Managing 10 Common Risks (Part 2)


YFP Co-Founder and CEO, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD and YFP Co-Founder and Director of Planning, Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®, RICP®, wrap up a two-part series on 10 common retirement risks you should plan for.

Episode Summary

While a lot of emphasis is placed on the accumulation phase when preparing for retirement, there is considerably less focus on simple strategies for turning assets into retirement paychecks, for example. This week, Tim Ulbrich and Tim Baker wrap up a two-part series on 10 of the most common retirement risks you should be planning for. Today, Tim and Tim cover the five remaining risks: frailty risk, financial elder abuse risk, investment risk, work risk, and family risk. 

Key Points From the Episode

  • A brief recap of part one. 
  • Frailty risk and what its major financial effects are. 
  • How a good support system and a clear living situation can be a solution to frailty risk. 
  • Financial elder abuse risk, why it often goes unnoticed, and how to mitigate it.
  • Why unity among siblings is important to avoid financial abuse of elders. 
  • Insight into investment risk and its subsections. 
  • How ensuring that your paycheck isn’t tied to the market can solve market risk. 
  • The value of flexibility and inflationary protection to protect yourself from investment risk. 
  • How liquidity risk plays a role in investment risk. 
  • Sequence of return risk and how it can damage your overall retirement sustainability. 
  • Work risk and some of the reasons that you might have to retire early. 
  • How planning for retirement readiness at different ages can assist with work risk. 
  • What re-employment means and how it affects work risk. 
  • How the loss of a spouse affects the person left behind financially and how to mitigate this. 
  • Ways that having unexpected financial responsibility can affect your retirement plan. 
  • Why having a third party you can trust to help with unexpected risks is helpful.

Episode Highlights

“Studies have shown that, the longer you retire, the more your mental health decreases over time.” — @TimBakerCFP [0:03:25]

“Involve trusted family members [to avoid elder financial abuse].” — @TimBakerCFP [0:10:16]

“You mitigate market risk when a lot of your paycheck is – not tied to the market.” — @TimBakerCFP [0:14:12]

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[0:00:00.8] TU: Hey everybody, Tim Ulbrick here, and thank you for listening to The YFP Podcast where, each week, we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom.

This week, Tim Baker and I wrap up our two-part series on Ten Common Retirement Risks to Plan For. Now, in planning for retirement, so much attention is given to the accumulation phase but what doesn’t give a lot of press is how to turn those assets into a retirement paycheck for an unknown period of time. When building a plan to deploy your assets during retirement, it’s important to consider various risks to either mitigate or avoid altogether and that’s what we’re discussing during this two-part series, where today we cover the five remaining retirement risks, including frailty risk, financial elder, abuse risk, investment risk, work risk, and family risk.

Make sure to download our free guide that accompanies this two-part series, Retirement Roadblocks: Identifying and Managing 10 Common Risks. You can download that at, yourfinancialpharmacist.com/retirementrisks. Again, that’s yourfinancialpharmacist.com/retirementrisks. 

Before we jump into my conversation with Tim Baker, let’s hear a brief message from YFP team member, Justin Woods.

[YFP MESSAGE]

[0:01:11.5] JW: This is Justin Woods from the YFP Team with a quick message before the show. If you listen to the YFP Podcast, you may learn something every now and then, either from Tim Ulbrick, Tim Baker or one of our guests. A lot of people listen to this show but they may not execute or implement the things they learn. As pharmacists, we know the impact of non-adherence on patient outcomes and their overall well-being. 

As a pharmacist myself and part of the YFP Team, I talk with pharmacists every day who are confused about how to implement financial knowledge. Pharmacists share with me that they are treading water financially, maybe took a DIY approach, reached a plateau, and are confused about what to do next, or those who work for decades can see the light at the end of the tunnel and feel uncertain about how the next chapter will unfold. 

If that sounds like you, one, it is not uncommon to feel that way, and two, does it make sense for us to have a conversation to see if YFP Planning can help you? Visit yfpplanning.com or follow the link in the show notes to find a time that works for your schedule.

[INTERVIEW]

[0:02:16.9] TU: Tim Baker, welcome back.

[0:02:18.7] TB: Good to be back Tim, how’s it going?

[0:02:20.1] TU: It is going well. Last week, we started this two-part series on 10 common retirement risks to be planning for. We talked about things like longevity risk, we talked about inflation risk, we talked about excess withdrawal risk. Listeners can tune back to that episode. We’ll link to that in the show notes if they didn’t already listen, and we’re going to continue on.

So number six on our list of 10 common retirement risks to plan for, number six is frailty risk. Tell us more about this.

[0:02:49.0] TB: Yeah, so this is more related to – it’s a risk that as a result of either mental or physical deterioration of your health, mental health, physical health that you as a retiree might not be able to have sound judgment in managing your financial affairs or care for your home, those are the two big ones. 

So just like we talked about in the last episode, like, with long-term care and a long-term care risk, this is one that people are like, “Oh yeah, this is important but it’s not going to happen to me” and you know, what studies have shown is that you know, the longer that you retire, the more your mental health decreases over time. 

So this is going to be, you know, where we really want a good support system. So a solution here is if we work longer, obviously, our mental acuity, our mental sharpness kind of stays intact longer. We’re not as isolated, there’s lots of studies about depression and loneliness, Tim, you know, creep in.

A lot of things that have not really been talked about as regarding retirement in the past and I think a lot of this points back to some of the frailty risk. So having a good network involving your family to have help, whether it’s with decision-making or chores, hiring someone to manage money or a trustee is another good solution here. 

Set up a power of attorney for you know, the financial situation. It can even be you know, things like healthcare. Probably a big thing that I often hear is having a good discussion and analysis of like the living situation, right?

[0:04:40.9] TU: Yes, yes.

[0:04:41.1] TB: So a lot of people as they age, they might not necessarily want to move out of the house where they raise their family. A house that might be three, four, or five bedrooms that has a big yard, lots of yard work, lots of housework. Maybe stairs to go up and down and because of the – you know, kind of the emotional attachment to the house, it’s just hard for the retiree to move on and you know, potentially downsize or you know, move into a townhome or a condo or a community that is different. 

That’s probably has one of the biggest effects on the frailty risk. You know, if you’re less likely, I think, to kind of be exposed to this risk if you have, again, more people around you that are dealing with the same thing. We mentioned a trust, so potentially putting assets in the living trust that are basically managed by the trustee which could be used as a retiree and then you could have a successor-trustee, which can be a family member or family members.

But the whole thing I think is to kind of you know, plan for this. You know, we want to make sure that we don’t necessarily have to go through the courts that we can kind of do this preemptive, even simplifying the finances. So things like you know, direct deposit, you know, automatic withdraw for bills, you know annuities, checks coming in the door rather than you know, having to make decisions regarding, “Okay, how much should I withdraw this year?”

These are all things that I think would help, you know, simplify and make this risk, not avoidable but mitigated, Tim.

[0:06:14.2] TU: Yeah, and as we wrap up the previous episode, part one, talking about the importance of planning for this early, right? So here, we’re talking about potentially deteriorating mental or physical health. You know, obviously, if and when that happens, guess it’s just a matter of time, right? For all of us but if and when that happens, we don’t want to be making these decisions in that moment, right?

So, how can we be having these conversations in advance? You talked about an important one that often comes up around housing, what’s the desire? You know, I’m thinking about things like legacy folders and making sure you’ve got good systems and documentations in place. I think the housing one comes up so often, you know? I’m thinking about even my own family. Like, sometimes it’s just hard to cut through the noise on this because you know, you gave one example where people may want to stay in their own home, I think that’s a common one.

The other one that I see as well is where people are adamant on like, “Hey, I don’t want to be a burden on the family. So, just put me in a facility.” It’s hard sometimes to cut through the noise of like, where does the true desire and how is that being projected and you know, maybe there’s an interest and a willingness and the financial means for children, you know, to be able to care for their elderly parents and that’s a desire, you know? 

For them to do but you know, you can’t get through some of those conversations. So just again, I think in a point of advocacy for talking through as much of this as possible, as early as possible, and for those that are listening where you know, maybe they have adult children that are going to be important caregivers, you know initiating that conversation with your adult children and those that are the children that have aging parents, you know, initiating those conversations as well.

[0:07:49.6] TB: Absolutely.

[0:07:50.8] TU: Tim, number seven, one that’s not fun to talk about, one that we have to just given, you know, the reality of what it may be, which is financial elder abuse risk.

[0:08:00.5] TB: Yeah, and this is the risk of being – basically being taken advantage of because of frailty. So these are kind of linked, Tim, and I saw a stat out there that this can cost anywhere from like, three to 36 billion dollars a year or something like that. It’s insane and probably the biggest culprits of this is people that the retiree knows and knows well. So that could be an advisor, financial advisor. 

It could be a family member, so adult children are probably the bigger abusers of this but 55% of these cases are family members, friends, neighbors, or caregivers, and the crime or the abuse can be anywhere from bad advice to fraud, barred against the person’s home. Theft, which could either be, you know, cash, taking money out of accounts, using credit cards, embezzlement. 

You know, misuse of power of attorneys, and unfortunately and I think it’s why it’s so hard to kind of like put a number to this, in terms of like what the losses are is that the abuse often goes unnoticed because you know that retiree can be embarrassed. They really don’t want to punish those that are close to them or they have fear of losing care that is being provided even though they’re being abused or even reprisals. 

And it’s one of the things that you know, as an advisor, even though we’re on that list of abusers, that we’re kind of trained to look for and ask questions in terms of like, “Okay, is there something going on? You know, what is the cognitive ability of this person? Are they making sound judgment? You know, who in the family is involved?” That type of thing.

And there’s been you know, I’ve heard of cases where it’s like, Mr. Jones is having USD 50,000 of work you know, done to his kitchen at 85 years old and that doesn’t necessarily make a lot of sense but it could be a contractor that’s kind of taking advantage and sometimes, Mr. Jones, it’s a little bit of – it’s being taken advantage of but it’s also could be like they like the company, you know?

So I think you know, a major solution for this, I would say is you know, involve trusted family members and I underline trusted and I underline the asset members. It’s a little bit of checks and balances. You know, if you have you know, two siblings that are kind of looking after, hopefully, they’re not both, you know, criminally minded but I think it’s good to have a few people that are you know, over-watching so to speak, the situation.

I think as much as the person, the retiree can protect themselves by staying organized, tracking possession, tracking their assets, you know, as much as they can open their own mail, sign their own checks, manage their investment, manage their statements, their investment accounts, their bank accounts, you know set up direct deposit as much as they can for social security checks or annuity payments.

That can again, help, not necessarily avoid but mitigate some of the exposure to this risk. You know, screen calls, solicitations, you know, get second opinions on, you know, we come across things even with clients where like, “Is this legit?” You know, like clients that are in their 30s, 40s, 50s and sometimes are like, “Uh, it’s not.” 

So you know, get a second opinion and make sure that we’re kind of hyper-aware because this is a big problem unfortunately and it’s tough to kind of diagnose and see and you know, at every angle, you know, because often the person that’s being abused is like for what I mention, is not necessarily willing to kind of come forward with this.

[0:11:54.5] TU: Tim, I have to bring it up since you mentioned siblings. I think this is an area where there’s so many dynamics, right? Every family’s different but you know I think that when you’re dealing with assets and estates and you know obviously, one, at the end of the day, is going to get assigned as a power of attorney and you know, people that are in are not in the will and whether those conversations are transparent or not. 

I feel like, any sibling dynamics, you know, you can just put a magnifying glass on them here. So you know, Cameron Huddleston, who we were referenced in a previous episode and we had her on a few episodes ago about initiating some of these financial conversations with your parents, talks about the importance of sibling conversations in unity, ideally, easier said than done, to then be able to obviously translate that with parents as well.

[0:12:40.4] TB: Yup, absolutely. 

[0:12:41.9] TU: Tim, number eight, investment risk, we talked about this briefly in the first part of this two-part series but I think it warrants going a little bit deeper. 

[0:12:50.8] TB: Yeah, so, investment risk, I’m kind of going to break this down into kind of sub-risk to this. So what I really want to kind of address here is market risk, interest rate risk related to the investments, liquidity risk, and then kind of come back to the sequence of return risk. So if I take these in turn, market risk is really the risk of financial loss resulting from movements in market prices. 

So, unfortunately, Tim, the market just doesn’t kind of increase steadily. As we go, we have lots of you know, ups and downs and twists and turns with regard to the market which often makes us kind of queasy as – and I would say, even more. I feel like for me when I first started to invest back in my 20s, you know, I would kind of feel those investments and I’ve kind of got to a point where I get zen and I try to like not pay attention to it because again, it’s not going to affect me until hopefully 30 years in the future when I do retire.

[0:13:46.6] TU: You should do some market meditations, right? Like – 

[0:13:48.6] TB: Yeah, exactly but for a retiree, who you know, like their paycheck and their livelihood is kind of tied to the market, I could see how that could be overwhelming and distracting. So a solution here is I think, I really strive for balance and flexibility. So, we kind of mentioned in the past, like a flooring strategy.

So you mitigate market risk when a lot of your paycheck is not coming or not tied to the market. So that’s where we you know, are essentially, we’re looking at essential expenses and we’re saying, “Hey, my essential expenses or my basic needs are covered with an annuity” or social security or very low risk, you know, government securities like treasury bonds. You know, treasury bonds, notes, that type of thing and we’re good.

The other part of that is allocation. So obviously, a lower percent of your portfolio in equity, you know, particularly leading up to retirement is going to be important to kind of mitigate market risk. So even in some of the – you know, the dot com crisis, the subprime mortgage crisis, you know, the COVID crisis, like the market is still doing this but if you have less equity exposure, it might not be Rocky Mountains ups and downs. 

It might be Appalachian Mountains ups and downs, where it’s a little bit smoother but I think, knowing what your allocation and what your glide path is, actually approach retirement is going to be important and then you know finally, I think for this particular risk is kind of going back to flexibility. 

So if you’re in a year where the market is down and maybe inflation is up, you know, inflation is up, like maybe we say, “Okay, we’re not going to take that USD 15,000 out to go travel.” you know, do this huge cruise or make this, “We’re going to forego that and see when the market kind of recovers and then we’ll kind of assess it from there.” So flexibility of like, what you’re withdrawing and when I think is going to be important with regard to market risk. 

The other ones, Tim, interest rate risk. So this is related to investment risk. So this is the risk of the change in value of an asset as a result of volatility in interest rates. So what does this mean? This essentially means that when interest rates go up as they have been over the last couple of years, the price of bonds go down. So there’s an inverse relationship. So, the price of individual bonds and bond mutual funds decreases. 

So when interest rates go down, the price of bonds go up. So this is not necessarily a concern when bonds are held to maturity or what I was mentioning in the last episode, a bond ladder. So if I buy a year, a bond, or six-month bond that basically, you know, comes up at the end of the next or at the end of this year or a year, 18 months, or whatever that looks like, if it holds maturity, the fluctuation in interest rates do not affect the bond price.

So you’re kind of inoculated from that. It’s when you kind of are coming in and out of bonds, that’s where it becomes problematic. The other risk associated with this is and I’ve seen this, so one of the things that I – because I’m a nerd, but one of the things I do with my emergency fund is I buy 12 months CDs every quarter. So I have a quarter one CD. So let’s pretend I have USD 20,000 in my emergency fund. 

10,000 might be in the high-yield savings account, 10,000 might be split up between four CDs and you can kind of think of these as like bonds. So Q1, I have 2,500, January one. Q2, April one, so on and so forth. So as prices, as interest rates have gone up, if I look back 12 months ago, man, I look at that interest rate, I’m like, “Man, that’s really low”. So when I renew, Tim, the – what I’m getting in terms of interest is a lot higher. 

The opposite came true, and this is what’s called reinvestment risk. I could have this bond that I just bought at five or you know, the CD or bond that I just bought at 5% but in a year or two years, it could be at 3% and then that’s the reinvestment risk. So that’s another risk that we have to, you know, kind of be aware of. So I think the biggest they hear is, again, things that are inflation-protected. 

So any type of income stream or investment that has inflationary protection like tips or strips, any type of COLA protection that’s going to really – what’s going to be to help reduce that risk and then finally with – or not finally, the third one is liquidity risk. So this is just basically the inability to have assets available to financially support unanticipated cashflow needs. I don’t think that this is a risk that’s really inherent just to retirement, we all have this at all times. 

It might be a little bit harder to overcome because we don’t have – we don’t necessarily have cash flow from like a set job but planning for this, you know kind of plan as best you can for what could happen. So what are the situations and then what levers can we pull? What are the assets that can be sold? You know, what are things that can’t be sold, which you know, assets that can be sold. 

It could be things like stocks and bonds and things like that. Maybe not so easily, it could be a business interest or real estate. You know, what are some other things that we can talk about to pull? Whether that’s life insurance, a HELOC, a reverse mortgage, and then one of the best reasons to employ a systemic withdrawal strategy is because of the flexibility. 

Because you have this pot of money that you can reach into and say, “Okay, I didn’t think needed USD 30,000 for X but now, because that money is there and I can put it into liquid form and pour it” then you know, that’s one of the things, versus, if you were to say, “Hey, I’m going to put all my money to an annuity” that’s not flexible and that’s not liquid.

So it allows you to change your strategy in the face of you know, new information, new situations, and finally, the last one here and again, Tim, we could probably do a whole episode on sequence of return risk is this is the risk that the timing of your withdrawals from a retirement account will damage your overall return and really like sustainability.

So when you withdraw from a bare market or when the market is down, it’s more costly than if you draw – you make that same exact withdrawal in a bull market. So this is – so what we’re saying is that a large negative return during retirement, so during that risk zone, that eye of the storm of you know, 10 years before retirement, 10 years after retirement, has a much bigger impact on wealth accumulation and success in retirement than a negative return outside of that.

You know, so that’s why I’m saying that at 40, you know, I get zen because I’m like, “It doesn’t really affect me if the market goes down 40% because I know I have 30 years for it to recover” and it’s going to go down 40% a couple of times probably over the next 30 years but if I’m retiring in five years, I’m worried, Tim. 

And again, like that’s where we have to be as safe as we can, you know, throughout our wealth accumulation journey is right in that zone, you know, five to 10 years before and five to 10 years after and this is when your retirement accounts are most vulnerable to investment returns and if you think about it, it kind of makes sense because this is typically, Tim, where you have the highest balance. 

[0:21:29.9] TU: That’s right.

[0:21:31.2] TB: So wealth rises rapidly as you approach your retirement date due to the fact that you’re putting in probably the most in contributions you ever have because you know, a lot of people are like, “Oh, I didn’t do enough of this, I need to make up, I got to catch up” because of investment returns and compounding.

So that’s when you’re – you know, and the research says that in a defined contribution plan, say, like a 401(k), this is interesting, you accumulate half the value of the account in the final 10 years of savings. So we say save early and often but what moves the needle most is in the last 10 years. In the early years of savings, additional contributions can replenish account losses but later, the contributions are a much, much smaller needle mover than it is like investment losses or gains.

[0:22:21.2] TU: Yeah, and Tim, just to put – you know, I was thinking about this because I think it’s harder, especially if folks are earlier in their career to understand kind of the numbers of this. If you’re nearing retirement, you have a three-million-dollar portfolio, as you mentioned, one part that’s going to keep driving that up is typically your, maybe you feel like you had to play catch up or you’ve got more discretionary income at that phase.

You’re hyper-saving, trying to max that account but even if we just look at that three-million-dollar portfolio and assume something like a 5% return in that year, you know, USD 150,000 of growth that’s going to happen in that portfolio in that year, right? And you know, people that are early saving, the timeline to get to 150 can feel like forever, and here, we’re talking about 150 of growth in a portfolio just in that single year. So I think that makes sense.

[0:23:05.4] TB: Yeah, and if you compare that to what you can legally contribute, that’s the big thing.

[0:23:11.8] TU: Oh my gosh.

[0:23:12.7] TB: Whereas like, you know now, you’re like, “Oh, 20,500, that’s like, that might be a third of my savings.” So it’s huge. So really, what the research shows that the magnitude of the impact of a large negative investment return or shock grew as the shock occurred closer to retirement. 

[0:23:34.8] TU: Yeah, exactly. 

[0:23:35.7] TB: So it’s like if the epicenter is – if the epicenter of that shock is close to age 65 when you retire, the consequences are greater than if it were at 58, which makes sense. So for sequence risk, the order of returns becomes a far more important concern in that span of time over the breadth of the entire portfolio, particularly in accumulation, it’s the average return that matters, right? 

So one of the things that I often say is like, “Hey, you don’t need a lot of bonds in your 20s, 30s, 40s” and I would even say even your 50s unless you’re retiring in your 50s, you don’t need a ton of bonds. So you want to almost have like a cliff, where you’re very much like pedal to the metal, you know you’re primarily in equities and then when you get to that 10-year, that’s where you start shifting, downshifting considerably. 

So like a hard break versus what a lot of people do is they kind of glide into it. So in their 40s, they put a little bit more bonds, in their 50s they put a little bit more bonds and so on and I just think that and I understand why, you know, you’re kind of easing into it but I just think you leave a lot of meat on the bone with regard to investment returns but the same is true is like you kind of have to like you know, you kind of have to get into that period of 10 to 15 or 10 years pre-imposed retirement date and then start adding equities back in, which a lot of people don’t do. 

So the solution for this is asset allocation and whether you follow on collide path or not in terms of you know, percentage of equities to bonds. Knowing what that is, we often see in the accumulation phase I think not the proper asset allocation, so too heavily in bonds and then closer to retirement, actually too heavily in equities. So if you have one of those shocks where the market is down, that’s where we have to have real conversations of like, “Hey, maybe we need to push out retirement to the market.” 

[0:25:34.3] TU: Retirement date, yeah. 

[0:25:35.6] TB: The market corrects. Again, flexibility; allow for changes and what is what’s wrong. So if it’s a down market, you know either decrease the amount that we’re withdrawing or actually that the entire – shift the entire equation where you know, we’re not retiring this year or next year, we’re retiring when the market recovers and then another solution is to kind of get out of the game or at least partially convert a portion of the portfolio to an income annuity, which essentially you know, means less overall volatility because you have that income for in place. 

[0:26:10.7] TU: Yeah, Tim, great overview. The investment risk to your point, we probably can and should cover this in more detail in future episodes and I think flexibility keeps coming back as a theme but I want to acknowledge how hard that can be, right? When you talk about something like, “Hey, maybe shifting your retirement date” makes a whole lot of sense objectively, right? 

If I had planned a retirement age, I’m listening of you know, 2026 and we see the market tank in 2025 like I’ve been mentally preparing for retirement in 2026, that’s a hard thing to consider but I think that open-mindedness and the options to be able to pursue some of those things that gives you more of that flexibility to maximize your portfolio is going to be really important. The other thing I just want to mention that we see a lot because especially folks that are maybe introductory in terms of investing or learning or aren’t working with a planner. 

I’m thinking about a lot of folks that are investing heavily in target date funds, where we maybe see some of that conservative investing happening too early, in my opinion, in the portfolio, yeah. 

[0:27:12.5] TB: Yeah and just to go back to what you’re – yeah, I completely agree it is and again, not every target date fund is created equal. We actually crack those target date funds open and you can see the allocation, you know something then might be 2035. You know, if you stack up a 2035 or 2055, you know target date fund, what is in target date fund A is going to be, you know 2035 is going to be a lot different than what’s in a target date fund B that’s in 2035. 

But to go back to your other point, you know like and we’re going to get into this in the next couple of risks here, sometimes like you’ve mentally said, “All right, I’m going to work for another two years” sometimes that decision is made for you and that could be hard. So then what do you do? 

So I think a lot of these risk is like if you can kind of maintain as much control over your destiny and I think part of this is having options, particularly with things related to work, it allows you to kind of pivot and adjust and kind of parry some of these things that are thrown at you because I keep saying, “I want to retire at age 70” you know? I mentioned earlier in the first episode of this is like that might be out of my control and you know, that’s something else we have to account for. 

[0:28:36.5] TU: Yeah, if Mike Tyson were listening, he’d say, “Everyone has a plan until they get punched in the mouth” so yeah. 

[0:28:41.0] TB: Yeah, exactly. 

[0:28:42.4] TU: So let’s talk about that, work risk is number nine on our list. What is that? 

[0:28:46.5] TB: So again, I’m going to break this down into some sub-risk. So the first one would be forced retirement risk. So this is the risk that work well and prematurely because of poor health, disability, job loss or to care for a family member because of some of these issues and this is an eye-opening stat, Tim, is 40% of retirees retire earlier than they plan and it’s really because of one of those issues, health, job loss, caring for a family member. 

This happened to my dad. My dad tells the story, you know, when we try to talk about this, you know his company was bought by another company. He was kind of duplicitous, you know, kind of at the tail end of his career and he was laid off. So it was – so if he was planning to retire by X and his portfolio and all, we had to kind of reconfigure, jostle things around, and make sure that we’re planning accordingly. 

So I think having like a pulse on kind of your retirement readiness at different ages, “So okay, what happens to my plan if I have to retire 10 years before I want to?” So for me, it will be 60, right? 65 like what happens. 

[0:29:54.8] TU: Yes, zero, one, two, three. 

[0:29:56.3] TB: Yeah and you know, what happens to my lifestyle, you know, what do I have to – like are there things that I, other levers that I can pull? So one of those I think is career. So I think staying current, you know learning new skills. You know I think, Tim, like we’re naturally like this as like lifetime learners and always trying to you know, self-improve. That’s not everyone’s cup of tea but I think maintaining your network. 

I don’t know the last time I actually put my resume together, Tim but I think that would be something that you would want to do. It is a lot easier to kind of brush that up every year or so versus kind of cracking that open every decade. Are there – is there opportunities to pivot to consulting, to kind of work on your own? I think a lot of people paying attention to severance policies and negotiating benefits related to your career is going to be important. 

Another thing to kind of you know, mitigate the health stuff is maintaining a healthy lifestyle. So you know diet, weight, sleep, exercise, and potentially reducing stress by cutting back hours. So we kind of mentioned of like a glide path of going from a one to a point eight to a point six, you know to work in a couple of hours here and there. So I think that can potentially allow you to work part-time longer into retirement by maintaining a healthy lifestyle, maybe meditation, all that kind of stuff. 

The second work risk we talk about is re-employment risk. So this is the inability to supplement retirement income with employment due to kind of down job markets, poor health, or if you’re caring for others. So I think for my dad, you know when I happened to him you know I think it was hard for him because he had worked for the same company for 40 plus years to actually go into market and interview and do something else. 

So for him, it was kind of more about like comfortability and he really didn’t have anything else outside of that where he could consult or do part-time. Like I’ve heard people like drive a bus for a school and liking that because you know, they’re connected to kids or turning hobbies into profit-making activities. I was talking with my brother and his fiancé last night because we were actually talking about, “Hey, when do you want to retire, and when is that?” 

You know, one of the things that he brought up that I thought was interesting, he’s like, “I think I’d love to do like a bed and breakfast.” That’s cool. You know, he likes to cook, he likes to host, so I think that would be something that would be good for him. 

[0:32:37.3] TU: That is cool, yeah. 

[0:32:39.4] TB: Planning on earning significant income in retirement may be unrealistic for a lot of people. There are certain industries where it’s very easily, you can very easily kind of pivot to a consultant role and make just as much money as you would working full-time but that’s not necessarily the case for a lot of people. 

So I think kind of again, planning for this, talking through this, and understanding you know, what are some things that you can potentially lean on or pivot to in the event that what you thought was a short thing, which was like your employment is not so much and again, I think this often is one of those things where it’s like, “Hey, that’s not going to happen to me.” 

[0:33:25.4] TU: Yeah. 

[0:33:25.8] TB: I think this has probably evolved over time, right Tim? Because again, it’s rare where you find someone like my dad that’s worked for the same company for 40 or 45 years. So I think our eyes are a little bit more open to this risk but I think what maybe might not be is the fact that like, “Hey, your health or someone close to you” or something like that could affect your timeline, so to speak for retirement. 

[0:33:50.1] TU: Yeah, and as you’re talking Tim, I’m thinking about many people in our community of which many of them have been on the podcast where you know I think they may intentionally or unintentionally are preparing themselves for something like this and the risk you’re talking about, right? They’ve got you know, maybe they’re investing in real estate in a variety of ways, they’re working a full-time job. 

They’re doing some consulting, they’ve got a side hustle, they maintain an active network, you know, they’re constantly developing their skills, right? Just multiple strategies of diversification that I think help mitigate against some of the risks that you’re talking and maybe they’re not even thinking about it in that way, it’s coming from an area of energy and passion but it can be really helpful as we talk about strategies to plan for this type of risk. 

[0:34:33.3] TB: Yeah, absolutely. 

[0:34:35.0] TU: All right, number 10 on our list is family risk. Take us home, Tim. 

[0:34:41.4] TB: Yeah, so the two kind of sub-risk that we would talk here is kind of the loss of spouse risk and then unexpected family financial responsibility risk. So the loss of spouse essentially is where you know, I’ll use myself, I retire at 70. I think I’m going to live at least to 87 or 95 and I pass away unexpectedly at 72, right? So the problem often with that is you know, you’re often, for many spouses, you’re kind of known two social security income streams, right? 

You know, so one of those goes away, you keep the highest one but the problem – so you still have all of the assets. The spouse will inherit all the assets that are in their name obviously but what typically doesn’t reduce is a lot of like living expenses, right? So your food might go down but you’re still going to have to pay if you have a mortgage. 

[0:35:41.9] TU: Property taxes, yeah. 

[0:35:42.8] TB: Or you know, rent or things like that, tax, all of those, your utilities are going to be very similar. So just because your income or a good chunk of your income could be cut in half or even a third, your expenses don’t and what we’ve seen at least with baby boomers is that you could be a widow or a widower for 15 or 20 years. So it’s not like you know one and this happened where one spouse dies and the one will die within a year or two. 

I mean, but that does happen but you could have long periods of time where you’re by yourself. There was a stat that I saw that was really interesting Tim, was within five years of a death of a spouse, 40% of widows become impoverished. 

[0:36:29.9] TU: Wow. 

[0:36:31.1] TB: That’s insane to me and I think if I had to guess, I don’t know this Tim, but if I had to guess, I would think that that’s probably again, people that are lower income that might like a huge chunk of their livelihood is in disability. So if a good chunk or not, disability, social security, so a good chunk of that goes away, so you have two paychecks is now one, you know that could be very problematic for kind of sustainability of overall wealth.

But that to me was eye-opening and I’ve heard that before with husbands will say like, “I just want to make sure my wife is taken care of if I’m gone” and again, I don’t want to get into much of like gender roles and things like that. 

[0:37:17.4] TU: Sure. 

[0:37:17.8] TB: But I still think that that exists in a lot of relationships, particularly older couples where you know, one partner handles the money and the other one doesn’t or has an interest in the other one doesn’t. So you know I think the solution for this is and I’ve talked to people in the past is like, “I want a relationship with like an adviser where I trust them because even when I’m gone they’re going to take care of the person, you know, my spouse.” 

So I think having a relationship with that, with like a planner I think can be important. I think involvement, you know I often say this with couples of all ages, you know the more that you are involved with your plan. 

[0:38:00.6] TU: Absolutely, yes. 

[0:38:02.0] TB: And the more you are engaged with the plan like both of you, I think the better the results will be but I also understand that there’s some like, there’s some couples that there might be engagement in the front end and then maybe one spouse kind of you know drives the train after that but then often what happens is like again, if that spouse dies like they kind of have to reengage is necessarily like the easiest thing. 

So you know, what are the contingency plans if this were to happen? Even sometimes like when we – so if we were to say, “Hey Tim, you know we’re going to peel off a quarter million dollars of your portfolio to provide an income for you and Jess.” What’s attractive about those payoff schedules is like the one that just pays your lifetime is the highest but we would want to say, “Okay, let’s have a joint life payout.” So it would pay you as long as one of you are alive but that benefit is going to be lower. 

[0:38:54.8] TU: Yeah. 

[0:38:55.4] TB: So decisions like that, you know if you have second-to-die policies or you know again, social security claim, and there is a lot of people that they don’t look at the layers of that decision that says, “Okay, even if Tim is in poor health than Shay, if I have a larger benefit that I want to defer that I should defer, that benefit grows and then when I pass away, Shay takes that on.” 

So some of that, some of those nuances aren’t necessarily you know, evaluated. So those would all be things that you know again, it’s not just the abrupt, “Okay, the husband is gone or the wife is gone,” these are things that we have to bake into the plan as we go because you know, things like social security or you know, payouts and things like that have to be decided. So it’s not just the abrupt, “Okay, what happens once that happens in that moment?” 

It’s the multitude of decisions that you have to make potentially leading up to that and then lastly, it’s the unexpected financial responsibility risk. So this is kind of the risk of failure to launch, Tim. Like, “Hey, I’m 40 years old. I just lost my job” or “I’m divorced. I’m moving back in with mom and dad” or you know, care of a grandchild or because parents have problems with the law or drug addiction.

These things happen you know and sometimes, we can kind of put this thing in like a liquidity risk of like unanticipated events but I would say like those would be things that I would want as a planner to know like, “Is there a possibility for this and if this were to happen, what do we do?” 

[0:40:40.8] TU: Yeah. 

[0:40:41.3] TB: So that’s another you know, risk associated with family. Families can be great obviously but sometimes, you know that’s kind of my biggest fears. You know, I want to make sure that as I’m raising my kids and I know it’s the same, it’s true with you, Tim, like they can be contributing members of society that can you know, be self-sustaining but sometimes that’s even out of their hands, right? So we want to make sure that in the event that that happens, we can plan accordingly. 

[0:41:11.4] TU: Tim, as you talk about loss of spouse, a couple of things are coming up for me. One that’s timely, you know where Jess and I are working on, just updating your legacy folder that we created several years back but in our planning with Kelly from our team. You know, it’s a part of the process that we need to go back to and update it and you know to you comment about the importance of joint planning and all parties being involved ideally. 

Even in this situation where Jess and I feel like are both very well informed, I do take a little bit more of the lead but it is very much a shared agenda and execution and both of us engage with Kelly and the planning. You know, instructions on that legacy folder, while they’re spelled out as much as possible, you know for either one of us or in the event that both of us were to pass away, for our parents or whoever it be taking care of the finances and the boys, it’s, “Go call Kelly.”

Like someone we trust that knows this plan inside out, that has these documents, that understands all of the nuances and what is going on and that is so reassuring. Again, assumption is you have someone you trust. It’s so reassuring to know you’ve got a third party that not only is there to help you develop the plan but is there in the event of some of these challenging situations that may come up to make sure that we’re executing how we wanted it to be executed. 

[0:42:29.1] TB: Yeah, and I think what’s not covered in that like I love the idea of like, “Okay, Kelly is a safe haven. She has the documents, she knows your situation” I think it’s hugely, hugely important but I think what’s also not necessarily discussed in this is kind of like the emotional or social like you know, my parents were in town this week, last week and this week. It’s been cool because my brother has been in town too. So the three of us have been spending – my dad just turned 77. 

[0:43:04.9] TU: Baker pow-wow. 

[0:43:05.7] TB: Yeah, and we’re joking with my dad that like if mom passed away like I don’t think my dad knows how to do like a load of laundry. I love you Dad but he’s very much dependent on my mom over you know, decades and decades of marriage. If something were to happen to them like I think he would have to move in with one of us to live and I’m sure a lot of people are thinking about their parents and they’re like, “That’s my dad” or “That’s my mom.” 

You know, I think even that of the loss of spouse not just from a financial standpoint or like where are the documents or things like that, it’s kind of a day-to-day living in terms of like what am I doing or what can I do or what can I not do and who am I leaning on and you know, I think that kids are probably the first people that are in that role but I think like having those conversations before that happens where maybe there’s less emotion involved is smart. 

So it’s not just the numbers, it’s what’s the quality of life? What are the things that we’re going to do to move forward? And unfortunately, it is part of life and I think the more that you can kind of get in front of things just like anything else, I think the better result you’ll have. 

[0:44:28.6] TU: Yeah, the other thing to your point about the emotional journey that’s coming up is a throwback almost four years ago now but we had on episode 127, we had on Michelle Cooper, who wrote the book, I’ve Still Got Me: A Widow’s Journey to Love, Happiness & Financial Independence, lost her husband to suicide and talks about not only the importance of joint planning and shared understanding of processes and documentation but also navigating that in the midst of that emotional loss. 

Great interview, great resource. We’ll link to that in the show notes as well. Tim, this has been fantastic as we’ve covered in two episodes now 10 of these risks we need to be planning for and mitigating the best that we can. For folks that are listening, you know you heard a theme here of early planning. Obviously, we would love to have the opportunity to talk with you if you are interested in working more with one-on-one with a financial planner that you can trust. 

We’ve got a team of fee-only certified financial planners, tax professionals that work with pharmacists households all across the country at all stages of their career. You can learn more by going to yfpplanning.com and you can book a free discovery call from that site. Again, yfpplanning.com. Tim Baker, as always, great stuff. Thanks for the contribution. 

[0:45:41.4] TB: Yeah, thanks, Tim. 

[DISCLAIMER]

[0:45:42.4] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and it is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information on the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archived newsletters, blog posts, and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of Your Financial Pharmacist unless otherwise noted and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward-looking statements, which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements. For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. 

 

Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 324: Retirement Roadblocks: Identifying and Managing 10 Common Risks (Part 1)


On this episode, sponsored by First Horizon, YFP Co-Founder and CEO, Tim Ulbrich, PharmD and YFP Co-Founder and Director of Planning, Tim Baker, CFP®, RLP®, RICP®, kick off a two-part series on 10 common retirement risks you should plan for.

Episode Summary

While a lot of emphasis is placed on the accumulation phase when preparing for retirement, there is considerably less focus on simple strategies for turning assets into retirement paychecks, for example. This week, Tim Ulbrich and Tim Baker kick off a two-part series on 10 of the most common retirement risks you should be planning for. Today, Tim and Tim cover five of these risks, including longevity risk, inflation risk, excess withdrawal risk, unexpected health care risk, and long-term care risk. You’ll find out why thinking about retirement as “half-time” is a good idea, the different options for taking out annuity payments, and why it is important to think about your withdrawal strategy, as well as what a bond ladder is and why you should consider unexpected medical expenses. Whether you are nearing retirement or are still in the accumulation phase, this episode is full of valuable insights. 

Key Points From the Episode

  • Introducing our two-part series: 10 Common Retirement Risks to Plan For.
  • Background on why this topic is so important. 
  • A couple of important disclaimers before we dive into the first risk: longevity risk.
  • Viewing your retirement as half-time.
  • Setting realistic expectations and planning as best as you can.
  • Lifetime income: a careful analysis of Social Security claims and strategies.
  • Options for taking out annuity payments.
  • Thinking about your withdrawal strategy to mitigate longevity risk.
  • The risk associated with inflation.
  • Defining what a bond ladder is.
  • Why social security is one of the most important things to evaluate in retirement.
  • How higher rates of inflation have influenced Tim and the planning team’s models.
  • Whether or not there should be a glide path from a work perspective.
  • Excess withdrawal risk: depleting your portfolio before you die.
  • A quick recap of the bucket strategy.
  • Healthcare risk: facing an increase in unexpected medical expenses in retirement.
  • Different Medicare plans: Part A, B, C, D, and Medicare Advantage plan.
  • Long-term care risks, misconceptions, and potential solutions.
  • The tough conversations we need to have. 

Episode Highlights

“You get to the end of the rainbow and you have hundreds of thousands of dollars, millions of dollars. The question is how do you turn these buckets of assets into a sustainable paycheck for an unknown period of time?” — @TimBakerCFP  [0:04:02]

“Longevity risk is the risk that a retiree will live longer than – they expect to. What this really requires is a larger stream of lifetime income.” — @TimBakerCFP [0:06:48]

“There’s a whole other race to run after your career.” — @TimBakerCFP [0:09:44]

“The more flexible you can be with your withdrawal rate, the greater the portfolio sustainability will be.” — @TimBakerCFP [0:18:15]

“Essentially, in retirement, inflation could erode your standard of living.” — @TimBakerCFP [0:21:57]

“Abrupt retirement sounds sweet, but in reality, it’s really hard.” — @TimBakerCFP [0:29:37]

“It’s less about the actual return and more about the sequence of when that return comes that can affect the sustainability of [your] portfolio.” — @TimBakerCFP [0:35:55]

“You don’t want to get to a point where you’re having to go through the courts to get the care that your loved ones need. If you can avoid that at all costs, even if it means having an uncomfortable conversation – I think it’s needed.” — @TimBakerCFP [0:48:07]

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

[INTRODUCTION]

[0:00:00] TU: Hey, everybody. Tim Ulbrich here, and thank you for listening to the YFP Podcast, where each week we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom. This week, Tim Baker and I kick off a two-part episode on 10 Common Retirement Risks to Plan For.

When planning for retirement, so much attention is given to the accumulation phase, but what doesn’t get a lot of press is how to turn those assets into a retirement paycheck for an unknown period of time. When building a plan to deploy your assets during retirement, it’s important to consider various risks to either mitigate or avoid altogether. That’s what we’re discussing during this two-part series, where today we cover the first five common retirement risks, including longevity risk, inflation risk, excess withdrawal risk, unexpected health care risk, and long-term care risk.

Now, make sure to download our free guide that accompanies this series, that guide being the 10 common retirement risks to plan for, and you can get that at yourfinancialpharmacist.com/retirementrisks. This guide covers the 10 common retirement risks you should consider and 20-plus solutions on how to mitigate these risks. Again, you can download that guide at yourfinancialpharmacist.com/retirementrisks.

All right, let’s hear from today’s sponsor, First Horizon, and then we’ll jump into my conversation with YFP Co-founder and Director of Financial Planning, Tim Baker.

[SPONSOR MESSAGE]

[0:01:24] ANNOUNCER: Does saving 20% for a down payment on a home feel like an uphill battle? It’s no secret that pharmacists have a lot of competing financial priorities, including high student loan debt, meaning that saving 20% for a down payment on a home may take years. We’ve been on a hunt for a solution for pharmacists that are ready to purchase a home loan with a lower down payment and are happy to have found that option with First Horizon.

First Horizon offers a professional home loan option, AKA doctor or pharmacist home loan that requires a 3% down payment for a single-family home, or townhome for first-time home buyers, has no BMI, and offers a 30-year fixed rate mortgage on home loans up to $726,200. The pharmacist home loan is available in all states, except Alaska and Hawaii, and can be used to purchase condos as well, however, rates may be higher and a condo review has to be completed.

To check out the requirements for First Horizon’s pharmacist home loan and to start the pre-approval process, visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/home-loan. Again, that’s yourfinancialpharmacist.com/home-loan.

[EPISODE]

[0:02:36] TU: Tim Baker, welcome back to the show.

[0:02:38] TB: Good to be back, Tim. How’s it going?

[0:02:39] TU: It is going. We have an exciting two-part series planned for our listeners on 10 common retirement risks to avoid. I think as we were planning for this session, just a lot of depth and great content, that we want to make sure we do it justice, so we’re going to take five of these common retirement risks here in this episode. We’ll take the other five next week. Tim, just for some quick background, one of the things we’ve talked about on the show before is so much attention is given when it comes to retirement, is given to the accumulation phase as we’re saving, especially for those that are maybe a little bit earlier in their career.

It’s save, save, save. But I even think for all pharmacists in general, that tends to be the focus, but we don’t often think about, what does that withdrawal look like, both in the strategy, which we talked about on the show previously, but also in what could be some of the risks that we’re trying to mitigate and avoid. Just give us some quick background on why this topic is so important as we get ready to jump into these 10 common mistakes.

[0:03:39] TB: Yeah, I think to your point, I think a lot of the, even the curriculum in the CFP board standards is very much focused on the accumulation phase of wealth building. I think there’s a lot of challenges and a lot of risks that you have to deal with during that phase of life and during that phase of wealth building. But I think what doesn’t get a lot of the press is like, okay, you get to the end of the rainbow and you have hundreds of thousands of dollars, millions of dollars. The question is, how do you return these buckets of assets into a sustainable paycheck for an unknown period of time?

While navigating a lot of these risks, I don’t know if it’s risk avoidance, Tim. I think it’s just planning for the risk. We’re talking about avoiding risk. Some of these, you can’t really avoid. You just have to plan for it. I think that what we’re finding is, I think the whole general rule of like, “Oh, I’ll get to the end and I’ll have a million dollars and I’ll put 4%, $40,000 a year for the rest of my life.” There are a lot of pitfalls to that. I think that hopefully, this discussion shines a light on some of that. I think it is just important because we think that the – the hard part is, hey, I just need to put assets aside, but I think equally as hard as, okay, how do I actually deploy these assets for a wealthy life for myself in retirement?

[0:05:04] TU:  Yeah, good clarification, right? Some of these, as we talked through the 10. Avoidance isn’t necessarily possible. It’s the planning for, it’s the mitigation, minimizing the impact, however, we want to say it. I think, what you articulated is just spot on, right? I think when it comes to retirement planning, saving for the future, we tend to view that nest egg number, whatever that number is, 3, 4, 5 million dollars, whatever is the finish line. So many other layers to consider there.

Not only getting there, which again, we’ve talked about on the show previously, and we’ll link to some of those episodes in the show notes and the strategies to do so, but how do you maintain the integrity of that portfolio? How do you optimize the withdrawal of that portfolio? If we’re doing the hard work throughout one’s career to be saving along the way, we want to do everything we can to get as much juice out of that as possible.

That’s the background as we get ready to talk through some of these 10 common retirement risks to plan for. Just a couple of important disclaimers; We’re not going to talk about every retirement risk that’s out there, of course, Tim, so there’s certainly more than 10. You’ll notice them overlap as we go through these. This is not meant to be an all-encompassing list. Of course, this is not advice, right? We obviously advocate that our listeners work with a planner, no matter what stage of your career that you’re in to be able to customize this part of the plan to your personal situation.

For folks that are interested in learning more about our one-on-one financial planning services, our team of certified financial planners and tax professionals, you can go to yfpplanning.com and book a free discovery call to learn more about that service.

All right, Tim. Let’s jump off with number one, which is longevity risk. What is that risk? Then we’ll go from there and talk about some potential solutions.

[0:06:48] TB: Longevity risk is the risk that a retiree will live longer than what they expect to. What this really requires is a larger stream of lifetime income. We’ll talk about that in a second. The hard part about this whole calculation, Tim, is that there are lots of unknown variables. Unfortunately, or fortunately, I guess the way – depends on how you look at it, I don’t know when I’m going to pass away. Social Security obviously has a good idea of what that is. When I was preparing for this episode, Tim, I looked at, I went onto socialsecurity.gov, and put in my – basically, my gender and my birthday. It comes back with a table and it doesn’t factor in things like health, lifestyle, or family history. But it essentially says that for me at 40 – oh, man, it’s tough to look at that, Tim. 40 years old in 10 months, that my estimated total years, I’m halfway there.

[0:07:47] TU: Halfway. I was going to say. Yeah.

[0:07:49] TB: I’m 81.6. Now, once you get to age 62, then it starts to go out. At age 62, it says I’m going to live to 85. If I make it age 67, then it says, hey, I’m going to live to 86 and change. Then at age 70, which is when I think I’m going to retire, Tim. That’s my plan, at age 70, 87.1 years. I think that for a lot of people, this is an unknown. I overlay like, okay, when did my grandparents pass away and things like that.

Some general stats, one in four will live past age 90 and one in 10 will live past age 95. I think these stats fly a bit in the face of Social Security, but maybe not. I think they factor some of this in. One of the big discussions that we have in our community is like, what should we plan to? What should we plan to? Should it be age 90? Should it be to age 100? We default to 95, which is right in the middle. For me, being in my 40s, it says 87.1-years-old.

I think, this unpredictable length of time really puts a huge unknown out there in terms of like, okay, because there’s a big difference between I retire at age 70 and I pass away at 87. That’s 17 years of essentially, senior unemployment retirement. Or if I live to 100, which is another 13 years. It’s huge. I saw a visual table recently, not to go on too much of a tangent, but it was like, your youth and then your college years was – If you imagine a square, was a shade on the square and then your career and then your retirement and your career and retirement in this visual were pretty close.

[0:09:33] TU: Which we don’t think about it like that, or I don’t, at least.

[0:09:36] TB: No, I don’t either. But I saw that. I’m almost eyeballing them, like, they’re pretty close. People think of like, “Oh, rat race and things like that,” but there’s a whole other race to run after your career. I think we overlooked the time on that. I do think that people will, because especially with a lot of the economic things people may be joining the workforce later, starting families later, maybe starting to save later, we’re living longer that it could push everything to the right a little bit. I think that could be one of the things that they do with Social Security is that maybe we don’t get our for retirement age of 67, then we get the for all credits at 70. Maybe they push those back a little bit. But it’s still a long time, Tim, is what I’m saying.

[0:10:23] TU: Yeah. It really is. As you’re sharing, Tim, it reminded me of a great interview I had with a retired dean and faculty member, Dave Zgarrick on episode 291. He talked about exactly what you’re saying in terms of that timeline perception. He was really encouraging our listeners to reframe your retirement date as essentially, half-time, right? We’ve got some opportunities to reset, reframe, and figure out, but it’s not the end of the game. There’s a whole other half that needs to be played. Obviously, here, we’re talking about making sure that we’re financially prepared for it, but there’s certainly much more to be considered than just the financial side of this as well.

I think the piece here that really jumps out to me, Tim, when people think about longevity risk is there’s really a lot of fear that I sense from individuals of – and the last thing I want to do is run out of money. I don’t want to be a burden to my family members. I really want to make sure I plan for this. The challenge, I think, here is there’s a balance to be had, right? We also don’t want to get to the end of our life and we’ve been sitting on this massive amount of money that maybe it’s been at the expense of living experiences along the way. I think this is just a really hard thing to plan for. To your point, I think a general number is a good place to start. So much of this literature on longevity comes down to family history, lifestyle, and other things that are going to help inform this.

[0:11:44] TB: I don’t think that you can – oftentimes, when we work with particularly younger pharmacists, we’ll get to a point and they’re like, “Hey, I got it from here. I’m good.” It’s almost like, they chunk the next five or 10 years of their life is autopilot. I always be – if I look back at the last five or 10 years of my life, it’s been anything but that. What I would say to, even in retirement, you have to take it year by year and you have to assess this year by year. I think, hitting the easy button and saying, okay, for the next five or 10 years, it’s going to be like this, is not great for your plan, right?

I think that’s probably if we talk solutions, we’re probably going to say this on repeat with a lot of these is like, you have to plan for this as best you can. Whether it’s set in a realistic expectation. For me, I think it would be irresponsible for me to say like, okay, 87 years old. I’m going to retire at 70, have set – and again, we’ll talk about this, too, is I might not retire at 70. I might have to retire a lot sooner than that. If I say, “Hey, 70.” Then I have to plan for 17 years, I think that would be really irresponsible. I think, set in realistic expectations in terms of life expectancy. Consider personal and family health history.

I think, you do pay a price, Tim, for a longer plan horizon, to your point, because you need more resources, which means that you have to save potentially more in your accumulation phase. Then when you’re in retirement, you have to be more conservative with what you’re withdrawing. That could lead to, again, you forgoing things today for a longer future, I guess, or being all sustained. That’s definitely one thing. It’s just, how do you best plan for that longevity?

[0:13:32] TU: You know, the other thing that’s coming up for me, Tim, as you’re just sharing this solution around planning for longevity is if folks end up erring on the side of your example, right? Social Security says one number. Maybe we’re planning 10 years further than that. Then there’s an interesting – certainly, you’re mitigating one risk, but you’re also presenting another risk, which is potentially having excess cash at the end of life, which obviously, there has to be planning done for that. What does that mean for the transfer of assets? Is there philanthropic giving that’s happening?

Then there’s a whole tax layer to that as well, right? In terms of, how are the taxes treated on that if we’re planning, perhaps, to not die was zero, but we may have additional funds that are there at the end of life. Just another great example, I think, of where financial planning comes together with the tax plan, and obviously, everyone’s situation is going to be different.

[0:14:21] TB: Another solution that would bring up for this risk, Tim, would be lifetime income. This is where I think, really a careful analysis of Social Security claims and strategies is needed. Because I think a lot of people, they’re like, “Okay, I’m 62. I’m eligible for my Social Security. I think, my parents died at 80. Probably going to die right there.” There’s a lot of things that I think we just blow through. One of the biggest retirement decisions is just going to be this decision on how and when you’re going to claim. Social security is a lifetime income. If you start claiming at 62, you’ll get that until you pass away. Start claiming at 70, and you’ll get a much greater benefit until you pass away.

There are not very many sources of income like that. Pensions might be another thing, but that would be one of the things that we would want to make sure that if we need X per month, or per year, a good percentage that is lifetime income, meaning not necessarily out of your portfolio, on a 401k.

Another way to do this is to transfer the risk of longevity to an insurance company by purchasing something like an annuity, so you can provide protection from the risk of dying young by purchasing a term certain. You could say, “Hey, I want this annuity to pay me for a lifetime and I’ll get a lesser amount, or for the next 10 years and I might get a higher amount.” But a lot of people are really not crazy about that, because they could give an insurance company $100,000 and then get one or two payments and die the next month or whatever. There are refund riders and things like that, so I think looking at that is something that definitely in the lifetime income.

I think, one of the things that people don’t know of, is if you have a 401k, a lot of people, they’ll take a lump sum and they might put it into an IRA. One of the things that you could do is take annuity payments for life out of that plan. What they essentially do is go out, most of the time they go out and buy an annuity for you. That’s a way to do it, instead of taking a lump sum, you can buy, basically, annuity payments from a 401k, that type of 403b. You can get lifetime income from insurance contracts, so cash value, life insurance, death benefit, there’s an annuity option.

This can even be true for a term policy. If I pass away and shay, most times will elect a lump sum, but you can say, “Hey, I want this payment for life, or for X amount of years.” Those securities are probably going to be the biggest ones, but then an annuity or something like that would probably be a close second to provide lifetime income for you to negate some of the longevity risks that’s there in retirement.

[0:17:04] TU: Yeah, a couple of resources I want to point our listeners to episodes 294, 295, you and I covered 10 common social security mistakes to avoid, along with a primer we did back on episode 242 of Social Security 101. Really reinforces what Tim’s talking about right here. Then we covered annuities on episode 305, which was our understanding of annuities, a primer for pharmacists. Certainly, go back and check out those resources in more detail. Probably lots of avenues to consider, but any other big potential solutions as people are trying to mitigate this longevity risk?

[0:17:37] TB: I think, probably the last one, and I mean, there are others, but probably the last big one I would bring up is probably, what is your withdrawal strategy? We’ve mentioned the rule of thumb of 4%, but I think that’s limited in a lot of ways. One is a lot of those studies are based on a finite number of years, i.e. 30 years from age 65 to 95, and we know that people are living beyond that 30 years that that’s been planned. That’s one thing.

For longer periods, the sustainable withdrawal rate should be reduced, but typically, only slightly. What’s left out of that, the 4% study is flexibility. The more flexible you can be with your withdrawal rate, the greater the portfolio sustainability will be. When the portfolio is down, and you can withdraw less, that allows you to sustain the portfolio a lot longer. Then, I think, the other thing that’s often overlooked with this is that typically, and we’ll talk about sequence risk, but typically, once you get through that eye of the storm retirement risk zone, you want to start putting more equities back into your portfolio.

I think, just the proper allocation strategy, which is where you’re considering portfolio returns, inflation, what your need is, what your flexibility is. Again, I think that becomes a lot easier, or palatable if you have, say, an income floor, or if you have a higher percentage of your paycheck coming from Social Security. All of these things are kind of, just like systems of the body are intertwined, but just your withdrawal strategy and allowing for that to sustain you for a lifetime is going to be very, very important along with some of the other things that we mentioned.

[0:19:19] TU: Yeah. Tim, I think there are a couple of things there that are really important to emphasize, that I think we tend to overlook when it comes to the withdrawal strategy. One of which you mentioned was that flexibility, or the option to be flexible on what you need. When we show some of these examples, we just assume, hey, somebody’s going to take a 3%, or 4% withdrawal every year, but depending on other sources of income, you’ve mentioned several opportunities here, depending on other buckets that they have saved, right? That flexibility may, or may not be there, which ultimately, is going to allow for us to be able to maximize and optimize that even further. All right, so that’s number one, longevity risk.

Number two is inflation risk. Tim, I think this is probably something that maybe three, four, five years ago, people were asking, hey, what inflation? Obviously, we’re living this every day right now. We’ve seen some extremes, although our parents would say, we ain’t seen nothing yet from what they saw growing up. What is the risk here as it relates to inflation?

[0:20:16] TB: We’re going to talk about inflation a few times in this series. What we’re talking about with regard to this risk is this is really the risk that prices of goods and services increase over time, right? The analogy or the story I always give when I talk about investments is that the $4 latte that you might get from Starbucks in 2020, 30 years might be $10, $11, or $12. If you look back at, I would encourage a lot of people that, hey, I had a conversation like this with my parents like, “What did you buy our house back in New Jersey?” I think they said, it was $41,000.

Now, when they – because they were – we were talking about what we bought our house at and the interest rates are like, it’s unbelievable. They don’t understand. I think this is a huge thing, especially with retirees, you’re thinking, or you’re dealing with a fixed income, more or less. The larger percentage of your income that’s protected against inflation, which social security is, which is another reason that it’s also very valuable is because it’s lifetime, but then basically, it gets adjusted by the CPI.

When you work, Tim, inflation is often offset by increases in salary, right? The employer has to keep pace as best they can –

[0:21:42] TU: Hopefully. Yeah.

[0:21:43] TB: Yeah. Or they’ll lose talent. In retirement, inflation reduces your purchasing power, so you don’t have an employer to raise. Now, like I said, you can think of social security like that, because they’re going to do that adjustment every year. But essentially, in retirement, inflation could essentially erode your standard of living.

Again, the first solution here is to plan for this. I would throw taxes in here, but even inflation is often overlooked in terms of like, how do we project these numbers out? What is a realistic estimate of inflation over the long term? I would encourage you, again, I’m a financial planner, so I’m biased, but I think using software and accounting for inflation almost by category of expense. We know that things like medical expenses, and the inflation for medical expenses is going to outpace a lot of other things, whether it’s fuel, utilities, or food, that type of thing.

That would be the big thing. I think overlaying some type of inflation assumption into your projections and seeing how that affects your portfolio, your paycheck is going to be super important. Another solution to this, Tim, would be going back to longevity. We talked about lifetime income. I’m going to say, not necessarily lifetime income, but inflation and adjust in income. Social Security, again, is the best of this. That we saw last year, I think it was – someone might have to correct me. It was like, 9% year over year. That’s pretty good.

If you were to buy an annuity, a lot of insurance companies won’t offer a CPI rider. They might say, “Hey, your payment in your annuity, you can buy a rider, which is going to cost a lot of money,” that it says, it’ll go a flat 2% or 3%. The insurance companies are not going to risk saying, “Okay, it’s with whatever the CPI is, because they’re not going to be able to price that accordingly.” Inflation-adjusted income.

Some employer-sponsored plans, like a pension, could offer some type of COLA increase. This is more typical in government pensions, government plans than it is with private plans. Like I said, you can purchase a life annuity with a cost-of-living rider, but it’s typically very limited and very, very expensive. You might get, for kicks, Tim, these are just round numbers. You might say, “Hey, give me straight up $1,000 as my benefit.” But if I add a, COLA rider, or something like that, it could cut it down to $800. Again, that’s not real numbers. That could be the cost there.

Then the last thing for this is to build a bond ladder using tips. A bond ladder is essentially, and we could probably do a whole episode on this, Tim, but a bond ladder would be, hey, basically, I want to build 10 years of income, say. Let’s say, I’m retiring in 2024, or let’s say, 2025. My first bond ladder might come due at the end of 2024. Then that’s going to give me $30,000 or $40,000. At the end of 2025, going in 2026, the second run of my bond ladder is going to pay me and basically, do that for the next 10 years.

Then essentially, what you do is you try to extend that ladder out. You might go to year 11, might go to year 12 as you’re spending that down. A good way to do that is with tips, which is an inflation security, an inflation-protected security. That’s one way to inoculate yourself from the inflation risk.

[0:25:14] TU: I looked up Social Security while you were talking there, you’re spot on. 8.7% in 2023. Yeah, that’s significant, right? I think especially for many folks and hopefully, as our listeners are planning, that won’t be as big of a percentage of the bucket for retirement. The data shows that across the country, it really is.

[0:25:33] TB: Yeah. I think, again, I think, when we’ve gone back to my own, it was something like, if I claimed at 62, I have to remember the numbers. If I claimed that 62, my benefit would be $2,500. If I claim at 70, I think it’s over $4,000.

[0:25:49] TU: Something like that. Yeah.

[0:25:50] TB: But then, if you then tack on the inflation on that, it’s just huge. Again, I think, that is going to be one of the most important things that you evaluate in retirement is the social security stuff.

[0:26:01] TU: One of the other thoughts that have gone to mind, Tim, as you were talking with inflation is just rates of return. We tend to, at least on a simple high level, right? We think of rates of return and a very consistent 7% per year. We know the markets don’t obviously act like that. We have huge ups, huge downs. We’re seeing that with inflation as well, right? We tend to project 2%, 2.50%, and 3%. But we lived in a period where inflation was really low. Obviously, we’re now seeing that bump up. My question for you is, as you beat this up with the planning team like, has this period of high inflation, at least higher than what we’ve seen in our lifetime, has that changed at all? Some of the modeling, or scenarios that you guys are doing long term?

[0:26:42] TB: I think, we’ve ticked it up a bit. I definitely think it’s probably too soon to say like, hey, for the next 30 years, we got to go from 3%, which has typically been the rule of thumb, to 5%. I think as we get a little bit further from quantitative ease in and putting a lot more money in circulation and we’re seeing the result of that, that I do see some modification of models and that’s going to be needed.

One of the things that the government and the Fed try to do is keep inflation at that 3%. I just don’t know if they’re going to be able to – the new norm might be keeping it as close to 4%, or 5%, right? I would say for me, and again, I try to keep on this as best I can, but I think for me, I think it’s a little too soon to tell. To your point, the reality is that I would say, less so for inflation, because I think there is a little bit of the thumbs on the scale with the government and the Fed, but we do see fluctuations in market returns. We’re seeing now more fluctuation in inflation.

I think, a lot of what I’m reading is that we’re probably at pretty much the end of rates going up. But I’m interested to see is like, okay, when they start to potentially reverse, or normalize, what is the new normal? I think if you put as much money in circulation as we have, I think this is one of the side effects, and we’re paying for that now.

[0:28:15] TU: The thing that’s coming to mind here as you’re talking about inflation risk and even tied to longevity risk is we often assume retirement is a clean break, right? You were working full-time, you’re no longer working full-time. For many folks, either based on interest, passion, or financial reasons, there could very well be some type of part-time work, right? Whether that’s consulting, whether that’s part-time PRN work, or whatever. To me, that’s another tool you have in your tool belt, when you talk about inflationary periods, or what’s happening in the market and whether or not we need to draw from those funds. Having some additional income, if you’re able and interested, could be an important piece of this puzzle.

[0:28:57] TB: We often think of a glide path in retirement. Meaning that, the closer we get to retirement, the less stocks we have, the more bonds we have, safety, that type of thing. I think, we have to start talking more about a glide path, like a work perspective, where you go from 1 to 0.8 to 0.6 to 0.2, or whatever. Then maybe, it’s just 10.99 PRN, or something like that. This is for a variety of reasons. It’s for the reasons that you mentioned market forces, and inflationary forces, I think even more so for mental health.

[0:29:29] TU: Mental health. Yeah, absolutely.

[0:29:31] TB: IR, like we talk about our identity and role and things like that and a soft landing. I think, abrupt retirement sounds sweet, but I think in reality, I think it’s really hard for, if you’ve been in the workforce for 30 years and there might be people that are like, “Nope. You’re crazy, Tim.” I talked about this and some retirees will probably roll their eyes. When I took my sabbatical, it was just a month, right? It wasn’t a ton of time. I literally was like “All right, I’m not going to touch work.” I’m like, “What am I doing?”

I guess, my thought process was I could see how it could be where you’re directionless, right? I spent a lot of time planning for just that month and I’m like, it was an interesting test case for me to be like, all right, I just need to make sure that when I’m positioning myself, I still have availability for meaningful work and other interests and things like that. Yeah. I mean, everything that you read is that the best thing to combat a lot of these risks is actually not to retire. It’s to work or work at a reduced – If you’re working and you’re not drawing on your portfolio, then problem solved. Obviously, we know that’s not necessarily the best solution.

I think, having the ability to do that, there’s from a mental health perspective and a lot of these other reasons. I think pharmacists in particular are positioned with their clinical knowledge and things to do things with their PharmD that provide value in retirement and that are not necessarily stressful, or strenuous. So — 

[0:31:04] TU: Yeah, I think that feeling of contribution is so important. I just listened to a podcast this week with Dr. Peter T on one of my favorite podcasts, The Huberman Lab Podcast, and he was talking exactly about longevity and some of the risks to longevity in that context of mental health. He was talking about the value of contribution, the value of work. I think for all of us, it’s natural in those moments and seasons of stress. That feeling of contribution can get overlooked, right? I mean, I think it’s a natural thing to feel. Really, really good discussion. I think, it highlights well. We’re obviously talking about X’s and O’s in terms of dollars. But when it comes to retirement planning, so much more than that.

Number three, Tim, we talked briefly about, but we can put a bow on this one, would be excess withdrawal risk. Tell us more here.

[0:31:52] TB: Yeah. This is really just that you’re withdrawing at a rate from the portfolio that will deplete the portfolio before you die. Which is one of the biggest fears and one of the biggest risks is like, “Hey, I just want to make sure that I have enough money to last me throughout retirement.” I think, the biggest thing again for this is to have a plan, have a strategy and be flexible with that plan.

There are ways that you can build your retirement paycheck, and we’ve talked about this before, where it’s coming from a variety of sources. At the end of the day, there is still going to be a portion of your paycheck, the retiree, you are pulling the string. You’re saying, “Okay, I’m going to get X amount from Social Security, potentially X amount from maybe a floor, an annuity, but then the 60%, or whatever it is has to come from these buckets that I’ve filled in the accumulation phase.” Like I said, the default that a lot of people use is, hey, it’s the 4% rule. There are other strategies, like [inaudible 0:32:54], guardrails that are more, look at market forces, look at inflation, and then basically, adjust your portion of your paycheck accordingly.

If you do that consistently and you stick to that plan, you’ll basically see the portfolio sustained for 30-plus years. I think that’s probably the big thing that in all the research says is that if you can adapt your spending, which is hard, right? It’s hard for us to do that in the accumulation. It’s often hard for us to do that in retirement, but if you can adapt your spending with the ride the roller coaster of market volatility inflation, it lands in sustainability. We’ve also talked in the past about the bucketing strategy. You make sure that you have the next five years, basically, in very CDs, money markets, very safe investments. Then that allows you to inoculate, at least for the next five years to do more mid-risk type of investments. Then for those 15-plus years, more risky investments with regard to the portfolio.

The bucketing strategy is just a take on the systemic withdrawal strategy but allows the retiree to understand more and compartmentalize and say, “Okay, if I have the next five years planned out, if I need 40,000 times five years, I had that in that bucket. I don’t really care what the market does. If the market goes down today, I know that in most cases, it’s going to recover in the next three and a half, four years and we’re good to go.”

Again, a lot of people, I think will say, “All right, well, this year, regardless of what’s going on in the world, I need this. Then the next year –” Then they wake up and they’re like, “Man, I had a million dollars, seven years in retirement, I have 200,000 left. This is no bueno.”

[0:34:51] TU: Yeah. Another important point you’re bringing up here and you mentioned earlier in the show, I think we tend to oversimplify, especially when we’re thinking accumulation of, “Hey, I’m going to save two, three, four million dollars. Maybe I’m going to be moderately aggressive, or aggressive. Then I retire.” We don’t think about what is the aggressive to moderate to non-aggressive strategies of investing in retirement, right? We’re not taking a portfolio of two, three, four million dollars, and also just moving it into something that’s liquid. We still have to take some calculated risks, to your point earlier, that we’ve got potentially a long horizon in front of us.

Tim, what I think about is the double whammy of potentially, when you retire, which depending on where the markets are, you may or may not have control of that. I think about people that may have retired pre-pandemic, not knowing what was coming and then the markets did their thing. The double whammy I’m referring to is if you retire and start withdrawing at a period where the market’s down significantly and you’re dependent on that draw, we’ve got a double effect of what we’re getting hit there.

[0:35:52] TB: Yeah. We’ll get into more of that in the sequence risk, in terms of, it’s less about the actual return and more about the sequence of when that return comes. That can affect, basically, the sustainability of that portfolio.

[0:36:06] TU: Since you mentioned the buckets and building retirement paycheck, as you call that, we did cover that previously, episode 275. We’ll link to that in the show notes. That was one of four episodes that we did, 272 through 275 on retirement planning. All right, so that is number three, excess withdrawal risk. Tim, number four on our list is unexpected healthcare risk. Tell us more here.

[0:36:29] TB: Yeah. This is the one we haven’t really covered much. We probably should give it a little TLC, maybe in future episodes. I think that Medicare and the decisions around Medicare is also another huge decision to make in retirement. This is the risk of facing an increase in unexpected medical expenses in retirement. One of the things that people often get wrong is that it’s like, okay, I qualified for Medicare at 65, I’m good. All my medical costs will be taken care of. That’s not true.

The decision of when to enroll and whether to choose the original Medicare or Medicare Advantage plan, choosing the right Part D plan for drug prescription is really going to be important. The figures, they’re not overly impressive, Tim. In 2019, they said, the average male at age 65 is going to spend about $79,000 to cover medical, or healthcare costs in retirement.

[0:37:25] TU: That’s lower than I would have thought, to be honest.

[0:37:26] TB: Yeah. Now, I think it goes out – I mean, again, you can see for if you look at the tables, what did it say for me at 65? I was going to live to – does it have at 62 to 67. Let’s say, it’s another 20 years. Yeah, it seems low to me. I mean, females, age 65 is a lot more, a $114,000 to cover healthcare expenses in retirement. It doesn’t seem a lot in terms of your – it is outside of housing. It’s going to be one of the bigger things, especially when you’re in the phase of older retirement.

I think, probably the default here is how – it goes back to planning and understanding what’s available to you. I think, choosing the appropriate insurance is going to be important. One of the things, and we’ll talk about this in the next for us, but a lot of people think that long-term care is covered by Medicare. It’s not. Another thing that a lot of people don’t know is that Medicare doesn’t have a cap on out-of-pocket expenses. If you have large amounts of medical expenses, you could be paying in perpetuity, that’s where a supplemental plan, or a Medigap plan will be important.

Part A, to break these down, covers a lot of hospital visits and inpatient stuff. Part B is more, I think, outpatient, like covers medical necessary services, like doctors, service and tests, outpatient care, home health services, durable medical equipment, and that type of thing. Then part C is going to be the drug. Then there’s going to be lots of variations of part D. Then what people then assess, Tim, is, should I get a supplemental plan, or a Medicare advantage, which is not to say under traditional Medicare, but it’s more of a reimbursement through a private medical, or private insurance company.

This is one that I think that is often overlooked. It’s hard because every state and area of the country is going to be different. What you can get if you’re a resident of Florida is going to be different if you’re a resident of New Jersey or Ohio. I think, going through this and probably on an annual to reassess is going to be an important part of making sure that you’re mitigating, as much as you can, the risks of those increased, or unexpected medical expenses while retired.

[0:39:44] TU: A couple of things are coming up for me, Tim, here. Obviously, one would be, if we’re factoring this into the overall portfolio nest egg. Certainly, that’s one strategy. The other thing I’m thinking about, if folks have access to an HSA and are able to save in that long term, without needing those for expenses today. Obviously, if you need them, you use them. That’s what it’s there for. If not, the opportunity is for these to grow and to invest and invest in a tax-free manner, such that it could be used for six-figure expenses right in retirement.

We’ve got an exciting – October is all going to be about healthcare insurance costs. We’re going to have several episodes all throughout the month. One of which is going to be focused on Medicare. We’re also going to be talking about healthcare insurance for those that are self-employed. Then we’ll be talking about open enrollment, other topics as well. Looking forward to that, that series that we’re going to do in October.

Tim, number five on our list, which will wrap up our part one of this two-part series is long-term care risk. Now, we did talk about long-term care insurance previously on the show. That was episode 296, five key decisions for long-term care insurance. You just mentioned not something that Medicare is going to cover. Tell us about this risk and potential solutions.

[0:40:56] TB: Yeah. This is the risk of essentially, not being able to care for oneself. It basically leaves you dependent on others to perform, or help you perform the activities of daily living. These ADLs are called activities of daily living, are bathing, showering, getting dressed, being able to get in and out of bed, or in and out of a chair, walking, using the bathroom, and eating.

Typically, if you need help with two or more of these things, this is typically where a long-term care insurance policy will actually trigger. These could be cause for a variety. It could be chronic diseases, orthopedic problems. Alzheimer’s is probably the biggest one that is the biggest threat for this particular risk. Planning for this is huge. It’s funny, Tim, because – not funny, but it’s interesting is that this is one of the risks where it’s like, it’s not me, right? It’s someone else. Most people see this as an important thing to plan for, but not necessarily for themselves.

The reality of the situation is that in most cases, family members will provide the care, which is about 80% of the time in the home, which is unpaid care, averaging about 20 hours per week. If you imagine that, Tim, if that were laid at your feet, how that could affect your health, your finances, just your career. That’s the effect that it has on the family. Like I said, most people think that Medicare covers long-term care costs. It doesn’t. Many people think that this is a risk, or a concern in retirement, but not necessarily for them, it’s for somebody else.

I think, one of the misconception is like, if you look at things like insurance, a lot of people think, “Hey, it’s too expensive.” In that, I think, that reputation is probably earned, because I think when they first priced these policies, when they first came out, there were a lot of policies that were not priced expensive, or the right way, so they got more expensive year over year. There was a study that said that less than 10% of people that were age 65 and older had long-term care.

Really, the need is not as long as you think. The average time that a male needs long-term care is about a little bit more than two years. For females, a little bit less than four years. Solutions for this is plan for this. Understand what are the risks and costs associated with it. Again, every state is going to be different in terms of what these costs and what is the cost for something like, anything from being able to age in place and have care given in your home, to a nursing home. Understand, what is that in your area? How do you want to pay for long-term care? I mean, how do you want that care delivered?

A big part of this is just getting organized with, okay, if this were to happen, where can we get this money from? Is it insurance policy that we purchased? Is it family members? Is it something like a reverse mortgage? Are there government programs, like if you’re a veteran, there’s some programs for that. Could be Medicaid. That is a program that’s probably the largest funding source of long-term care, but you have to be impoverished to do so. A lot of people will purposely spend down their estate to become impoverished, to get care, which there’s a lot of hoops and things that you have to be careful of.

But insurance is probably, and I know we did an episode on this is like, that’s another one to really look at is when to purchase a lot of people, we should really start talking about this in late 40s and purchase in your 50s. I think 55 is the average, if I’m not mistaken. If you wait longer than that, Tim, that’s when you have increased instances of the coverage being denied and it gets really expensive. You have to thread that needle a bit. What is the amount needed? 

I think at a minimum, we should be pricing and we say, okay, for us to be able to age in place, so have someone come in 20 hours a week, five days a week, or whatever that looks like, is that $3,000? Is at $6,000? Find that number and be able – A lot of the study says, the longer that you can stay in your home and not in a facility, the better. What’s the amount? Is that inflation-protected? What’s the elimination period? Is it a straight-up long-term care insurance plan? Or is it linked to an annuity purchase or a life insurance purchase?

Or if you go through all that, you’re like, “You know what? I got this and we sell fund, which is probably the most popular sell fund with the family as ad hoc caregivers.” Unfortunately, I think that’s really more of a lack of planning than anything. But that is a solution as well to say, okay, if that’s the case, again, looking at funding sources and things like that. This is another thing that I think is often overlooked, because, I think, some of the misconceptions about long-term care. But if you can get a policy that pays you $3,000, $4,000, $5,000 a month for care, to be able to stay in the home, I think for a variety of reasons, that’s worth looking into.

[0:45:57] TU: Yeah, Tim. I agree. I think that this is often overlooked, perhaps from a misunderstanding, or evaluating the risk. The other thing that comes up for me often here is just the difficult conversations that need to be had to really navigate this. We just, a few episodes had back on the show, Cameron Huddleston, who is just fantastic. She wrote, Mom and Dad, We Need to Talk, how do you navigate difficult financial conversations with parents? Some listening to this are thinking about it for themselves, certainly. Others may be working with aging parents and trying to navigate these conversations.

Who wants to initiate a conversation of, “Hey, Mom and Dad, what are you doing for long-term care insurance?” Or, maybe that age window has passed, where a policy makes sense. Now, we’re back to, okay, what’s the game plan? What does this look like financially? What does this look like in terms of the ability of our time to be able to care and care well? I think, there’s just a lot to navigate here that is not just financial, but that is emotional as well. She does a great job in that book, in the episode, we just recorded as well, of how do you initiate these conversations in a loving and respectful way? But more than anything, to get out in front of the planning. Again, whether you’re planning for yourself, whether you’re planning for aging parents, so important to be thinking about this.

[0:47:14] TB: This is a little teaser into our next few risks that we’ll cover in the next episode, in terms of just tough conversations that need to be had, so we can prevent things happening in the future. It’s just a byproduct of old age and being able to care for oneself. That can be hard to broach those subjects with your children, even adult children. There’s some vulnerability. I think, just the way you approach that, and obviously, people have different relationships with parents, and some people are really close. Some people brought up in a house where you don’t talk about money, you don’t talk about some of these things. It can be really hard.

I think, one of the things that really stuck with me with Cameron’s work and her writings is like, you don’t want to get to a point where you’re having to go through the courts to get the care that your loved ones need. If you can avoid that at all costs, even it means having an uncomfortable conversation, or maybe it’s not a conversation, maybe it’s a letter to break the ice and you go from there, I think it’s needed.

[0:48:25] TU: Yeah. Whether it’s the courts, or in her instance, and we’re going through this right now with my grandmother as well. But in Cameron’s instance, she had a mom who is struggling with memory loss and Alzheimer’s that her message, and one of her main messages, hey, you want these conversations and planning that be happening before those instances are in question, where you’re now dealing with more challenges of, is someone in the right state of mind to be able to make those decisions, and what are the legal implications of that?

Great stuff, Tim. That is five of the 10 common retirement risks to plan for. We’re going to be bringing the rest of this list back on the next episode, so make sure to join us here next week. Of course, for folks that are listening to this and thinking, “Hey, it’d be really helpful to have someone in my corner that really can help me plan for retirement, as well as other parts of the financial plan,” we’d love to have a conversation with you to have you learn more about our one-on-one fee-only financial planning services, as well as to learn more about your individual plan and the goals that you have. You can book a free discovery call by going to yfpplanning.com. Again, that’s yfpplanning.com. All right, we’ll see you next week.

[END OF EPISODE]

[0:49:33] TU: Before we wrap up today’s show, I want to again thank this week’s sponsor of the Your Financial Pharmacists Podcast, First Horizon. We’re glad to have found a solution for pharmacists that are unable to save 20% for a down payment on a home. A lot of pharmacists in the YFP community have taken advantage of First Horizon’s pharmacist home loan, which requires a 3% down payment for a single-family home, or townhome for first-time home buyers and has no BMI on a 30-year fixed-rate mortgage.

To learn more about the requirements for First Horizon’s pharmacist home loan and to get started with the pre-approval process, you can visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/home-loan. Again, that’s yourfinancialpharmacist.com/home-loan.

[DISCLAIMER]

[0:50:18] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide and should not be relied on for investment, or any other advice. Information on the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation, or offer to buy, or sell any investment, or related financial products.

We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. Furthermore, the information contained in our archive, newsletters, blog posts, and podcasts is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of your financial pharmacists, unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the dates published. Such information may contain forward-looking statements, which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements.

For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist Podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 318: Midyear Tax Planning and Projections


YFP Director of Tax, Sean Richards, CPA, EA digs into what midyear tax projections are, why they matter, and specific examples where a midyear projection can help someone optimize their financial situation. We discuss the importance of adjusting withholdings, ensuring record keeping is up to date, common pitfalls business owners and side hustlers can avoid with a projection and tax considerations with student loan payments coming back online. 

Episode Summary

YFP Director of Tax, Sean Richards, CPA, EA is here to explain the incredible benefits of doing a midyear tax projection. Sean defines a midyear projection, illustrates how projections can lead to peace of mind, and clarifies why everyone should be doing their own midyear projections. Our conversation explores why being proactive is always better than being reactive, why proactive planning is necessary when making big life changes like getting married or buying property, or getting a new job, and a host of real-world examples that highlight the undeniable benefits of midyear projections. Plus, Sean describes how midyear projections can help with tax optimization and strategies for student loan repayments, and the wealth of opportunities that become available to business owners who embrace proactive planning. 

Key Points From the Episode

  • A warm welcome back to the show to YFP Director of Tax, Sean Richards. 
  • How he’s spending his free time post-tax season as a father of two under two.  
  • Sean explains what a midyear projection is.  
  • How projections can lead to peace of mind. 
  • Why everyone should be doing a midyear projection for themselves, according to Sean.
  • Real-world examples of the benefits of doing a mid-year projection.
  • How being proactive is better than being reactive.
  • Why proactive planning is a necessity when making big life changes like buying property.
  • The role of midyear projections in tax optimization. 
  • Exploring the opportunities available for business owners who do midyear projections. 
  • How a midyear projection can help you optimize your student loan repayment strategy.

Episode Highlights

“A lot of people get stressed out about taxes, and I don’t blame them — when you’re in high school, you learn that the mitochondria is the powerhouse of the cell, but they don’t teach you how to file your taxes and do basic finance things.” — Sean Richards [04:52]

“At the very minimum, anybody who’s paying taxes and has a job and has to file a tax return at the end of the year should be doing some level of projecting the end of the year, to make sure that there’s no crazy surprises.” — Sean Richards [09:27]

“To the extent [that] you can mirror your tax strategy with your financial plan; it’s always just the best way to do things.” — Sean Richards [34:25]

Links Mentioned in Today’s Episode

Episode Transcript

EPISODE 318

[INTRODUCTION]

[00:00:00] TU: Hey, everybody. Tim Ulbrich here, and welcome to this week’s episode of the YFP Podcast, where we strive to inspire and encourage you on your path towards achieving financial freedom.

This week, I welcome back to the show, YFP Director of Tax, Sean Richards. We discuss mid-year tax projections, what they are, why they matter, and specific examples for how a mid-year projection can help someone optimize their tax situation. We discuss the importance of adjusting withholdings, ensuring record keeping is up-to-date, common pitfalls that business owners and side hustlers can avoid with a projection, and tax considerations with student loan payments coming back online in a couple of months.

You can learn more about YFP tax services for both individuals and businesses, by visiting yfptax.com. Again, that’s yfptax.com. 

[INTERVIEW]

[0:00:50] TU: Sean, welcome back to the show.

[0:00:52] SR: Thank you. It feels like I was just here, but it also feels like it was just tax season yesterday. So I think things are all sort of blending together at this point, which is understandable given the rush of everything, and now that we’re in summer and all these other stuff going on, but I love being here. I appreciate you having me back on.

[0:01:08] TU: So, we’re post-tax season, you’ve got a new baby in the house, we’re gearing up for mid-year projections, which we’re going to talk about in this show. You should have ton of free time right now, right?

[0:01:19] SR: Yes. I really haven’t been doing a whole lot of anything, just kicking back on the couch, and kind of watching a lot of TV and stuff. It’s baseball season, so you get these games that you can just sort of put on the background and sleep all day. That’s basically what I’ve been doing. Yes, nothing really going on at work, at home with the new baby, and the other baby who’s under two. Two under two right now, so yes, a lot of free time. So if you’ve got anything for me to work on, please send it over.

[0:01:45] TU: I’ll keep that in mind. Two under two is intense. Yes, I remember, I shared with you our oldest two are separated by 17 months, and our other two are a little bit further spaced out. Two under two is the real deal, so kudos to you and your wife for making that happen. As you were talking about yesterday, I can remember very well. All of a sudden, baby comes in and your oldest, who still is relatively young looks much older all of a sudden, right?

[0:02:11] SR: Yes, she does look much older. But she also – and I swear it’s not just a comparison of or – I shouldn’t say the comparison, but now, we have a little one at home, so she seems older. But I swear, overnight, she went from being one and a half to being two and getting those terrible twos right in there. Because, man, it’s like you said, it’s intense. But it’s really exciting, it’s awesome. I mean, I couldn’t be happier with everything. But it definitely – it’s exciting challenge what I would say for sure.

[0:02:38] TU: Well, last time we had you on was Episode 309. We talked about the top 10 tax blunders that pharmacists make. That was coming off of the tax season. Here we are, end of July, people may not be thinking about taxes in the middle and dead of the summer, but we’re going to hopefully make a case of why tax is important to consider not just in tax season, not just in December, but really year-round. That’s our philosophy, our belief at YFP Tax, that tax planning, especially for those that have more complicated situations, when done well, is exactly that. We’re doing year-round planning, we’re proactive, we’re not as reactive. We’re going to talk about an important piece of that year-round approach, which is the mid-year projection today.

Before we discuss that midyear projection and some of the details and reasons of doing that, Sean, just define at a high level by what we mean by that term, right? We throw that around internally all the time, mid-year projection. All of our listeners certainly are familiar, hopefully, with filing taxes, but maybe not as familiar have experienced with a mid-year projection, so tell us more.

[0:03:42] SR: Yes. I mean, it really is. I mean, if you look at what it says, it’s a projection, right? You’re projecting out what you expect to have at the end of the year. Really what it is, is kind of like putting together your tax return now based on what you think it’s going to be at the end of the year. Obviously, there’s some variables there and some uncertainty with everything, as it always is with forecasting, and budgeting, and that sort of thing. That being said, given that there are uncertainties, there are things that you want to keep an eye on. So, yes, it’s really just doing a projection of your finances for the year, and really coming down to what we think your tax return is going to look like. Are you going to have a bill? Are you going to have a refund or not? Then, looking at that and working backwards to say, “What can we do to tweak things?”

[0:04:29] TU: If we go a layer deeper on that, Sean, why do one? What’s the case to have one done? What’s ultimately the goal that we’re shooting for here?

[0:04:38] SR: I think the goal, and I mean, you kind of alluded to before saying, people probably aren’t thinking about taxes right now, and that’s totally fair. I don’t expect people to be thinking about taxes right now, unless you’re maybe me or somebody in similar shoes as me. But, I mean, the goal is that a lot of people get stressed out about taxes, and I don’t blame them. It’s one of those things where I joke that when you’re in high school, you learn that the mitochondria is the powerhouse of the cell, but they don’t teach you how to file your taxes, and do basic finance things, right?

What generally happens is, you’re kind of – I don’t want to say sweeping things under the rug, but you’re not thinking about taxes, or it’s not top of mind throughout the course of the year. Then you get to the end of the year, and you’re doing your return. It’s all looked back, all historical. There’s not much you can do at that point, right? So if you’re filing your return next year, for this year, and you have a big refund, it’s nice to have a refund, but you’ve got all this cash all the sudden that you could have been doing stuff with last year or vice versa. You get to the end of next year, or the end of this year, you’re filing next year, and you have a huge bill. 

Whether you have the cash ready to pay it or not, it’s nothing that anybody wants to have, right? The idea of doing the projection now is that you’re not getting to a point where you’re stressed out, thinking what could have been, what should have been last year. You’re getting ahead of those things and saying, “Hey, right now, things look great. Don’t have to do anything, or things don’t look as good as they could be. Let’s tweak that.” Or maybe not even any of those. It’s just, “Hey, right now, we have status quo, but there’s some things that are changing in my life. I have a new job, or I’m thinking about opening up a rental property, or something.” And making sure you have those ideas in your head now as opposed to, again, in April and handing it to your accountant saying, “I forgot to mention, I bought that house last year. Oops.” 

[0:06:30] TU: Yes. I think with most things, and we’ll talk about some specific examples here. But most things when we shift to more proactive planning versus reactive, and obviously, for those that have more complicated situations, the more the proactive planning is going to help, and we’ll talk about that in more detail as well. But anytime we make that mindset shift, there’s an opportunity for peace of mind as well, right? 

I think a lot of people I talked to, Sean, when I say, “Hey, what are the opportunities? Are you thinking about opportunities to really optimize tax as a part of your financial plan?” Everyone’s like, “Yes, I want to do that. I want to make sure that I’m paying my fair share, but no more.” But then actually, executing on that. It’s like this cloud of not exactly sure what to do, how to best navigate it. I think that is the opportunity with the year-round planning. Ideally, we’ll make the case of why it’s important to have a CPA in your corner throughout the year as well. But I think that peace of mind part is just such an important piece, especially for many pharmacists, I know that have this lingering question of like, “Am I doing everything that I can?” 

There’s the cleanup part where maybe we’ve made mistakes, or we don’t want to have a big bill or refund, but then there’s the second layer of that, which is that nagging feeling of like, is there something else I could be doing? I think that’s one of the values of projection.

[0:07:49] SR: Yes. I mean, the peace of mind thing, like you said, is that I feel like going back to the whole high school idea of how they don’t teach these things to a lot of folks. I remember getting my first job out of college, and I had an accounting, and finance, and even tax background from college. You start getting these things, “Hey, do you want to do an HSA? Do you want to do 401(k)?” There’s ROTH and traditional, there’s IRAs, and everything, and people are like, “I don’t know what any of this stuff is. I’m just – I’m getting a nice paycheck for the first time now. I know I want to save, but I don’t know what any of this stuff means.” It becomes overwhelming to have all these things happen. 

Like you said, you don’t want to come to the end of the year and say, I wish I had done these things. Because I didn’t know that that – there were opportunities for me to save here and there. I just thought that I was doing the right thing by putting my money in this savings account or in this account. So yes, I think, again, the uncertainty, and just sort of lack of general tax knowledge in the country, and world can be stressful, and not having to worry about that is very important for peace of mind in general sanity.

[0:08:55] TU: To be fair, the process is more complicated than it probably needs to be. And because of those complications, there’s some of the ownership and work on us to be planning throughout the year. One of that part piece, of course, would be the mid-year projection. Sean, I have to admit, prior to really building our tax team over the last several years, a mid-year projection was something that was never on my radar. My question for you is, should everyone do a mid-year projection? Is this necessary for everyone?

[0:09:26] SR: I think it is. I think at the very minimum, anybody who’s paying taxes, and has a job, and has to file a tax return at the end of the year should be doing some level of projecting the end of the year to make sure that there’s no crazy surprises. You might be listening to this and saying, “Hey, my situation is really simple. I filled out my W-4 when I started my job. I don’t have any crazy stuff going on. I don’t think I really need to do this.” But again, we keep coming back to this peace of mind thing and that could be great. Maybe your return last year was fine, and there’s not a lot of stuff that’s changing, but there’s always changes to the tax law. I mean, the W-4 system changes all the time, and I know it’s not – people don’t even realize, “Hey, can I claim one or two exemptions?” That’s not how it works anymore.

There’s always changes to the law, and changes to things going on. Even if you think your situation is pretty simple, and doesn’t apply to you, just doing a quick check to make sure, “Hey, there’s not going to be any crazy surprises.” Again, with something like that, you’re not necessarily going to be saying, “Oh, am I taking advantage of all the laws that exist out there, and all the different ways to maximize my tax savings?” But you just want to make sure. “Hey, am I going to owe a ton of money to the IRS at the end of the year? Or am I going to get a ton of money back that the government was borrowing for me for free for the entire year?” What I would say is, if your situation is simple, you can even just go on the W-4 calculator that the IRS provides. It’s not perfect, please. No one from the agency come and chase me down. It’s not a perfect system, and there’s a couple of different things that can happen there.

You might go through the whole process and get a bad answer, and then say, “Well, what am I supposed to do with this? It just says that I’m going to owe a lot of money, but I don’t know how to fix that.” Or you might just use the tool, and like I was alluding to, you might just get frustrated with it and say, “Why all these questions they’re asking me? I don’t understand any of this stuff. Why is it so complicated?” It is a good starting point, I would say, especially for those with simple situations. But I would just advise to be wary when you’re doing it that. It’s not a perfect system, and it definitely can be a little confusing.

[0:11:34] TU: Yes, and I’ll be honest. Admittedly, I’m a little bit impatient, and want these tools to always be better than they are. I’ve been on the IRS W-4 calculator tools, and I’ve gotten annoyed, frustrated playing with that, and I’ve left. I think the decision tree to your point, for people that have a very simple tax situation, can they do it themselves? The technical answer is yes, there’s an IRS calculator. It’s going to give you some basic information. The follow-up question is, do you want to do it yourself? Then the follow-up question to that is, if you have a more complicated situation, and/or you’re looking for more input of advice based on the output of that number, that’s really where some of the assistance and help that can come in from working with professionals. 

We’ll link to the show notes to the IRS W-4 calculator. Certainly, people can play around with that, which I’d recommend regardless of working with someone else. Just have a better understanding of the different inputs in these numbers, and hopefully to get the conversation started as well.

[0:12:33] SR: Yes, absolutely.

[0:12:34] TU: Let’s talk about some common examples where a mid-year projection can help. You’re in these conversations every week with our year-round tax planning clients. We talked about several these in Episode 309. Again, we’ll link to that in the show notes. That was a top 10 tax blunders that we see pharmacists making, which we recorded after the tax season. But I think there’s an opportunity here really to bring to life, not just the academic or theoretical side of why a video projection may be necessary, or what it is, but some actual examples where a mid-year projection can help. I’ll turn it over to you to talk through some of the most common places where you see this having value.

[0:13:11] SR: Yes, sure. I would say, the number one thing probably is just adjusting withholdings in a very – to put it in two words, it’s adjusting your withholdings, or adjusting withholdings, get rid of the “your” and “there.” But I swear I’m better at math than I lead on when I do these things. But yes, it’s adjusting withholdings. Like I said, the W-4 system changed a few years ago. Some people don’t even realize that. Some people probably set up their withholdings 20 years ago, and they started a job, and haven’t done anything since then. That might work for some folks, but the way that the W-4 holdings works now with the IRS is, if you get a new job, or your spouse gets a new job, or you have changes in salary, and everything, your withholdings might not be working the way that they did in the past.

You can also have other life events that sort of throw a wrench into that. You can get married, have kids. Even if you are married, you can kind of consider, and we’ll talk more about this when we get into some of the other blunders, but consider whether you’re going to file separately or file jointly. That changes the way you do withholdings and everything. That’s probably the number one area. Like I said, not withholding properly at the end of the year is almost certainly going to cause a problem whether it’s you’re over withholding, and you’re getting that big refund back, or you’re under withholding and you have a big bill.

The biggest and easiest way to kind of course correct. If we do a projection and we see that that’s the case, submit your W-4 to your employer, all of a sudden, you’re withholding appropriately. We can do a catch up to get you to where you need to be, or make an estimated payment or something like that. But I would say that’s the number one thing, and it sort of encapsulates everything else. Not entirely, but just because holding down a W-2 job and getting the taxes taken out of your paycheck is the way that most folks are paying the IRS. I would say, that’s probably the biggest one.

[0:15:04] TU: Let me jump in real quick, Sean, before you move on to other common examples, because that one is so common. I just want to highlight, when you think about the situations where withholding adjustments are necessary, you mentioned individuals getting married, and need dependents, I think about people that are moving different locations. They’re buying homes, new job, changes in income. These are things we see all the time. The key here is, we want to give ourselves as much time as possible to make a pivot, or a change on either side of this. We find out that, “Hey, because of X, Y and Z, we’re anticipating a big refund. All right. Let’s start making some adjustments, so we can put that money to work in other parts of the financial planning.”

We find out that we’re going to have a big liability due. Well, we just bought ourselves some more time to kind of budget, and plan before that payment is going to become due, and to make those adjustments. That’s so important, because this is the phase of life where we least want a surprise, right, especially on the O side of things, right? Getting married, moving, new job, new house, expenses that come with that. We want to avoid as much as possible, the surprises that are going to put a wrench in the other part of the financial plan. 

I think withholdings, adjusting withholdings, we all are familiar with. You take a new job, you fill out the paperwork, but I think we can lose track of that throughout the year, or when those job changes aren’t happening. Just wanted to drive that home further.

[0:16:26] SR: The two things I would add to that are also – the big thing is that people are always excited about getting their refunds, right? If you get a big refund back, it’s cool. It’s almost like you found the $20 bill in your pocket, and went to the washing machine that you didn’t know about. But would you rather find out about a refund in April and get the cash back now, or find out now that you’re going to be getting that refund back, and then be able to actually put that in a savings account, or deploy it somewhere where you can get a return on it, as opposed to getting that cash back in a few months with nothing, right? It’s like a net present value sort of thing to borrow finance term. But would you rather get $10,000 in six months or $10,000 now? The answer is now, right?

[0:17:09] TU: Especially with where interest rates are on high-yield savings accounts and other things.

[0:17:12] SR: Exactly. I mean, any way that you can get a little bit of extra cash now as opposed to tomorrow, or anytime in the future, it’s better. Then the other thing that I would say, I keep going back to the whole W-4 withholding thing, is that you might be perfectly fine at your job and nothing has changed. When I say perfectly fine, status quo, right? You’re working the same job, standard raises every year, nothing crazy going on. But with the way the W-4 systems work now, if your spouse goes and gets a new job, and they update their W-4, but you don’t do anything on your end, that can mess things up. People don’t realize that. They’re thinking, “Hey. You go and claim the exemptions that you’ve always claimed in the past.” We have one kid, or two kids, or whatever it is, but that’s not the way it works anymore. 

Even if it’s not you that’s had changes to your life, specifically, you have to think about your entire family and everybody who’s landing on that tax return at the end of the day. That’s one thing that definitely slipped some folks minds, I would say.

[0:18:05] TU: Great stuff. So just withholdings, I’m hearing you loud and clear, probably the most common thing that we see. It’s one of those things that big impact, but not a huge amount of work to be done to make this pivot. That’s a low hanging fruit. Talk us through other common examples where a mid-year projection can really help.

[0:18:24] SR: One good one is, this is another kind of, “Hey, this comes up every year with tax and filing is record keeping.” So we get to the end of the year, you purchased a rental property, and you’re excited about it, you’re getting some cash and everything. And now it’s time to file taxes. Instead of just your typical, “Hey, Sean, or Mr. CPA, here’s my W-2, and here’s my 10-99, and I’m good to go.” You have a rental property now. There’s a lot of things that need to go into something like that. You might not be thinking about some of the ins and outs that happen with that. I mean, if you have improvements to your property, those are treated differently than if you have electricity costs that go into your property. There’s a lot of different things that people don’t think about.

It’s not even that people don’t think about it, you don’t want to be scrambling at the end of the year to say, “Ah, I got to go get all those receipts, and get all my finances together and all that stuff, and try to get pulled all together when everybody’s trying to all do the same thing.” The extent you can get ahead of that now is great, obviously from a getting your ducks in a row and helping your CPA out at the end of the year. But also, going back to this whole idea of what am I going to owe at the end of the year? If you’re able to come to me or whoever you’re working with and say, “Hey, here’s the settlement statement for the house that I just bought. Here’s all the details. Here are all the closing costs and everything. Can you build that into my projection?”

The answer is absolutely yes. I’ll run that through and see what your rental is going to look like for the year or anything. It doesn’t have to be a rental property. You can be starting a side business, or doing anything like that. But just having this stuff together gets you ready for the end of the year, but also allows us to be able to, again, do those calculations to say, “Hey, you know, that rental that you built, or that you just bought, and you just did that big addition on? Well, that’s going to save you in depreciation this year, so you’re going to get a refund back. Let’s redeploy that cash.” Maybe you put it back into the rental property, I don’t know. But now we have the opportunity to do something with it.

[0:20:27] TU: I’m so glad you mentioned this one, because we are seeing a larger and larger part of our community that’s jumping into real estate investing. We’re seeing a larger percentage of our community that’s jumping into a side hustle or a business. Just so important, and we’ll talk about other things for business owners here in a moment to consider. But what we’re trying to avoid – not that this ever happened, Sean. But we’re trying to avoid is, hey, we get to tax filing, and you ask for the information come February and March. It’s like, “Oh, yes. By the way, I bought a rental property eight months ago. Can you figure this out right for me tomorrow?” Again, proactive planning.

[0:21:05] SR: Now, that example, “Hey, I bought a rental property last year, I forgot to mention it to you.” People might be rolling their eyes saying, “Okay. Well, if you work with an accountant, who is not going to tell their account about their rental property?” Sure, that’s totally – that might be unrealistic to some folks, I get it. But we’ve seen plenty of circumstances where folks have been, say, living in their house for 20 years. They decide, I’m going to rent out a couple rooms in the house this time for the first time. Hey, that’s awesome. Get some side income, be able to write off some of the expenses. It’s great. You’ve been living in this house for 20 years. We need to start taking depreciation on this house for rental, we need all the costs for the last 20 years that you put into that thing. 

I mean, I know now some people might be sweating saying, oh, boy, that’s a lot of look back, right? But it’s something that’s going to need to get done anyway, so we rather get ahead of it now or have me looking for that in April, right?

[0:21:55] TU: Yes, good stuff.

[0:21:56] SR: A little bit of a different example there. But hopefully trying to get some people thinking about things.

[0:22:01] TU: Yes. I think, just a proactive, when people are starting, I’m thinking about a lot of individuals in our community that are new real estate investors, first property. So I’m not sure, number one thing on their mind, especially if they’re not yet working with an accountant would be thinking about a lot of the record keeping and get ahead of the proactive tax planning. Now, if they’ve worked with an accountant, or they are multiple properties in, different situation, the trigger goes off. Similar if you’ve been in business for a while, the light bulbs go off more often, like, “Oh, yes. I got to talk to the accountant about this.”

What about opportunities for tax optimization? One of the things I think about with a mid-year projection is, “Hey, we’ve got an opportunity.” Again, proactive not reactive, to really look ahead and say, “Hey, there are the things that we can be doing to pay our fair share, but no more, and optimize their overall tax situation.” Tell us more here.

[0:22:51] SR: Yes, and this one’s good, because it applies to everybody in a very broad spectrum of things, depending on what you have going on in your financial life. That could be something where it’s as simple as, “Hey, I’m working a W-2 job, my spouse is working a W-2 job, we don’t have any kids, nothing else really going on. What can we do to optimize our taxes given our situation?” That’s a perfect example of where it’s an awesome time for your accountant and your financial planner to sort of work together. Because there’s always the idea of, “Hey, we want to maximize our tax savings, but we have a life. We need to be able to have cash to pay our bills and do other things too.” It’s a very delicate balancing act of, “I want to maximize my tax savings, but at the same time, have enough cash to do all the things that I need to do.” It’s a perfect time to work with both your accountant and financial planner to say, “Hey, should I put more money into my HSA? Should I put money into a 529 plan? What kind of thing should I be doing with my extra cash? That opportunity cost of $1?” 

But you can also have more, I say, more fun examples, because it’s the ones where you can really think about different opportunities that are out there, and how to take advantage of these laws. An example of that would be, say you have a side business, and you need to buy a new vehicle. There’s so many different things that you can do with that. I could spend an hour maybe. We’ll have a separate podcast on buying a vehicle in the active locations of doing so. I mean, get side business. Hey, how much are you going to be using this thing for business? Are we able to take a section 179 deduction? Is it a type of vehicle that would qualify for something like that?

We have all these new EV credits with the inflation Reduction Act. Are we going to be able to take advantage of all those? What if we use it for business? Can we still take the credits and everything? That might be a little bit of a nuanced example to some folks, but it’s a perfect example in my mind of how something that is, maybe on a day-to-day thing that happens. But something that purchase that folks are going to need to make in their life, most likely. You can really use that as an opportunity to say, “Hey, I got to do this anyway.” How can I also maximize my tax savings at the end of the day, when you’re sitting in a car dealership, and the people are trying to sell you on all these different tools, and upgrades, and everything. You’re probably not thinking, “Hmm. I wonder if I can save my taxes with this purchase?” But it’s always possible.

[0:25:15] TU: I’m going to give credit to our community. I think they are asking that question, Sean. 

[0:25:18] SR: They are, for sure. I’m getting that one a lot. In fact, I would be – I challenge you to find another community that’s as interested in the EV craze right now, which is awesome, I have to say. Really, folks should be looking more and more into that, because of those credits I just mentioned. They’re just every year getting better. But yes, I love it. I mean, every year I’m seeing more folks buying EVs, or buying used EVs and getting the credit now. It’s good stuff.

[0:25:46] TU: So, as we continue talking about some of these common examples where mid-year projection can help the other one that I think about, Sean, that we’re seeing a lot more of is, business owners, especially new business owners, right? Maybe they are thinking about tax considerations, withholdings, making sure they’re making quarterly estimated payments if they have to. What’s the opportunities here with the business owners as it relates to the mid-year?

[0:26:11] SR: Well, this is where I say, take all the examples I was just giving you, and throw them out the window. Not exactly, but when I was talking about how adjusting your withholdings is such an important part of this entire thing – I shouldn’t say throw out the window, because they do definitely go hand in hand. But if you’re a business owner, you have a side gig, you’re making money doing that, you’re almost certainly not getting W-2 income from that job. Or I shouldn’t say, you’re almost certainly not, but there’s a good chance you’re getting income from that business that is not having taxes withheld on it.

That is probably the number two or number one and a half blunder that we see where folks have these businesses. They’re not setting aside cash. They get to the end of the year, and are excited to give me the P&L that shows, “Hey, look at all this money I made.” Then I say, “That’s awesome. You owe some money in taxes, do you have that ready to go?” And it’s like, “Oh, I wasn’t thinking about that.” It goes hand in hand with the withholding, but it’s really just hey, let’s look at the business right now. Where are we mid-year? What’s your P&L look like to date? What kind of expenses do we have coming up for the rest of the year?

I talked about these EVs and things. How can we think about maximizing your savings there to reduce your business income, and be able to say, “All right. Well, at the end of the year, we’re expecting that we’re going to have $10,000 in business income.” Being able to say that now, and make your estimated payments up to the IRS is not only a good thing, it’s actually what you’re required to do per the law, right? That’s where I would say that a projection isn’t a nice to have, but an absolute necessity if you’re a business owner. It’s something where you can’t really say, “Hey, I’ll think about this later, or let’s just hope the chips fall in a good spot.” You really need to be doing a projection now to say, “What am I going to owe? Do I need to pay estimated taxes now? Should I have been making estimated quarterly payments up until now? Maybe I need to do a little catch up to hopefully not have a penalty at the end of the year at this point?” But again, to any extent you’re able to get ahead of that now, when I’m looking at the calendar, it says July versus December, January, April, it’s always better.

[0:28:25] TU: Yes. Especially, Sean, think about those new business owners again. Where, often, there’s excitement around the growth, there’s a reinvesting of any of the profits that tried to continue to grow the business. If we can identify some of this mid-year, sometimes that even inform some of the business strategy of like, “Hey, are we charging appropriately? What’s the service model look like?” And making sure that accounting for taxes as I look at the bottom line, and making sure we’ve got cash on hand to do these other things, and of course, not being caught off guard as you mentioned, as well.

[0:28:59] SR: Yes. To give – I don’t want to say a very specific example, because it’s something that we see very, very often. It might seem specific to some folks, but I think a lot of people here will resonate with this. But big one is, business owners, especially first-time business owners paying themselves. A lot of folks will do that, and then they’re maintaining their records and saying, “Hey, my net income is going to be pretty low at the end of the year, so I don’t have to worry about estimated taxes or anything like that.”

Then, we get to the end of the year, you provide your P&L, and I say – actually those $10,000 that you paid yourself, it’s not really a salary expense of the business, because it’s just a sole proprietorship. It’s actually just taxable income to you whether you took the cash or not. That can be very eye opening in a bad way for a lot of folks at the end of the year. It’s not entirely intuitive to think of it that way. You might be thinking, “Well, I worked with the business, I’m paying myself. Isn’t that an expense?” In the eyes of the IRS, depending on the way you’re set your setup, it may or may not be right. Getting ahead of that now and having your accountant maybe give you that bad news of, “Hey, that money is actually something you’d have to pay taxes on the end of the year now so you can plan ahead.” Is always better than getting that during your tax review meeting in April or May

[0:30:14] TU: Yes, and I get it. For the small business owners, we were there several years ago. For the small business owners that are just getting started, you’re looking at working with a CPA, it’s another expense in the business. I get it, right, but it’s going to pay dividends when you talk about making sure you’ve got the right entity set up classification, separate conversation for a separate day. Making sure we’re withholding correctly, getting financial statements set up correctly, making sure that we’ve got the books in good order. These are all going to be critical components to building a healthy business. You’re not going to get all of it right as you’re getting started, and that’s okay. I think some of that is natural. But making that investment, and building that in as an expense of the business from Jump Street as a part of just doing business to make sure you’ve got all of that in order is going to be really, really important. 

[0:31:05] SR: Right. It’s not just a nice to have, like I said, it’s something where that should be part of your plan from the get go, and you’re building this out. People might be thinking about, well, “Hey, isn’t this podcast supposed to be about doing a mid-year projection? Why are we talking about what my business looks like? That’s kind of different than my taxes, right?” But like I said in the beginning when I was explaining what a projection is, you’re really just basically doing your tax return for the end of the year with the information that you have on hand. One of the lines right there is, “Hey, what’s your business income?” If you want to do a correct projection for your taxes, you’re going to actually have to do a projection for your business as well. Even though it might seem like it’s going a little bit too far, or you might not be able to connect those dots there, it’s something that it’s absolutely intertwined and something that you need to do for sure.

[0:31:51] TU: Last but certainly not least on our list. What would be a YFP episode if we didn’t talk about student loans? We’ve got student loans coming back online here in a couple months. A lot of questions that are coming up related to the restart of those payments. We’ve talked at length before about how tax and student loans can certainly be intertwined, depending on one’s loan repayment strategy. What is the value or potential value here, Sean, for someone that’s optimizing, or looking to optimize your student loan repayment strategy, and where the mid-year projection can play a role?

[0:32:24] SR: Yes, I can’t take any paternity leave anymore. Because when I do, it seems like they announced all these student loan changes, and everybody’s all excited and wants to talk to their CPA, and I’m sleeping on the couch with the kids and everything. So lesson learned there. But yes, absolutely. This is another example that I would say is a perfect example of where mirroring your tax strategy and working with a financial planner, or whoever manages the finances in your household and does the budgeting and everything is absolutely instrumental in making all this work together. 

Yes. I mean, with student loans, there’s a lot of different things that can happen there. People have been asking me about, “Hey, so I’ve heard that you can file separately, or file jointly, or do these different things to maximize, or I should say, maximize savings, minimize my loan payments, or my spouse’s loan payments.” Yes. I mean, that is something that you can make that decision when you’re doing taxes to say, “Hey, am I going to file separately or am I going to file jointly?” But it all goes back to that idea of withholding and making sure that you were know how that works. Most of our clients who aren’t doing the student loan thing that are married, generally, are filing jointly. That’s what you’re told from the get go, right? “Hey, you get married, you file jointly, you get all the benefits of doing it, it’s the best way to do things.”

For someone to come and tell you, “Hey, actually, going forward, filing separately might be better for you.” Not only is that shocking for some folks to hear or like a complete change of what they’ve been told throughout the course of their life, but it also changes how they need to do withholdings and how they need to think about credits that they might have, whose return is that going to land on, and just one spouse withholds a little extra and recognize at the end of the year, they might get a refund that offsets their spouses tax bill or something like that.

There’s a lot of things that you want to make sure that again, even though you think that might be something you can make that call at the end of the year, just given all the different stuff going on with the loans, being on top of that now, and trying to minimize those surprises is always a better thing to do. To the extent you can mirror your tax strategy with your financial plan, it’s always just the best way to do things.

[0:34:31] TU: Great stuff. As always, Sean, as we wrap up this episode talking about the mid-year projection and the role it can play in some of the areas where it can effectively be utilized. Let me encourage folks to check out the resources and services that we have available, yfptax.com. We’ll link to that in the show notes. We have individual year-round tax planning led by Sean. As well as for those that do own a business, bookkeeping to fractional CFO, as well as some of the business tax planning that’s associated with that. Again, yfptax.com, you can learn more, you can schedule a call with Sean as a discovery call to learn more about that service, and whether or not that’s a good fit. Sean, thanks so much. Appreciate it.

[0:35:13] SR: Thanks, Tim. Talk to you soon.

[END OF INTERVIEW]

[0:35:15] TU: As we conclude this week’s podcast, an important reminder that the content on this show is provided to you for informational purposes only and is not intended to provide, and should not be relied on for investment or any other advice. Information in the podcast and corresponding materials should not be construed as a solicitation or offer to buy or sell any investment or related financial products. We urge listeners to consult with a financial advisor with respect to any investment. 

Furthermore, the information contained in our archive, newsletters, blog post, and podcast is not updated and may not be accurate at the time you listen to it on the podcast. Opinions and analyses expressed herein are solely those of your financial pharmacist unless otherwise noted, and constitute judgments as of the dates publish. Such information may contain forward-looking statements, which are not intended to be guarantees of future events. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements.

For more information, please visit yourfinancialpharmacist.com/disclaimer. Thank you again for your support of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. Have a great rest of your week.

[END]

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

Note: Referral fees from affiliate links in this table are sent to the non-profit YFP Gives. 

Read the full advertising disclosure here.

Bonus

Starting Rates

About

YFP Gives accepts advertising compensation from companies that appear on this site, which impacts the location and order in which brands (and/or their products) are presented, and also impacts the score that is assigned to it. Company lists on this page DO NOT imply endorsement. We do not feature all providers on the market.

$750*

Loans

≥150K = $750* 

≥50K-150k = $300


Fixed: 4.89%+ APR (with autopay)

A marketplace that compares multiple lenders that are credit unions and local banks

$500*

Loans

≥50K = $500

Variable: 4.99%+ (with autopay)*

Fixed: 4.96%+ (with autopay)**

 Read rates and terms at SplashFinancial.com

Splash is a marketplace with loans available from an exclusive network of credit unions and banks as well as U-Fi, Laurenl Road, and PenFed

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]